Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D16-0032 - CEC CORPORATION - TENANT IMPROVEMENTCEC CORPORATION D16-0032 City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.eov Parcel No: 2623049143 Address: 645 ANDOVER PARK W Project Name: CEC CORPORATION DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Permit Number: D16-0032 Issue Date: 4/26/2016 Permit Expires On: 10/23/2016 Owner: Name: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUAR Address: 150 CALIFORNIA ST, SAN FRANCISCO, WA, 94111 Contact Person: Name: STEVE GOFF Phone: (425) 766-6338 Address: 14432 SE EASTGATE WAY SUITE 230, BELLEVUE, WA, 98007 Contractor: Name: SWINERTON BUILDERS Phone: (415) 984-1248 Address: 260 TOWNSEND ST, SAN FRANCISCO, CA, 94107-1790 License No: SWINEB*992DR Expiration Date: 12/28/2016 Lender: Name: DAVID ZIMMER Address: 231 N MARTINGALE RD, SCHAUMBURG, IL, 60173 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION OF (2) FLOOR INTERIOR PARTITIONS, SUSPENDED CEILING (EXISTING TO REMAIN), PATCH AND REPAIR AND INTERIOR FINISHES. ALTERATIONS TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, DATA CABLING SYSTEM WILL BE ISSUED UNDER A SEPARATE PERMITS. SCOPE DOES NOT INCLUDE ALTERATIONS TO THE BUILDING ENVELOPE. Project Valuation: $500,000.00 Fees Collected: $8,354.22 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: VB Occupancy per IBC: B Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA FIRE SERVICE Water District: TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA SEWER SERVICE Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: 2012 National Electrical Code: 2014 International Residential Code Edition: 2012 WA Cities Electrical Code: 2014 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2012 WAC 296-468: 2014 Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: 2012 WA State Energy Code: 2012 International Fuel Gas Code: 2012 Public Works Activities: ChanneIization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Number: 0 Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: No Permit Center Authorized Signature: �U" v--� Date: — I I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions ttached to this permit. Signature: Print Name: Date:Z This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: 'BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS' 2: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 3: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 4: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 5: Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterially braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 6: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 7: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 8: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 9: Every occupied space other than enclosed parking garages and buildings used for repair of automobiles shall be ventilated in accordance with the applicable provisions of the International Mechanical Code. 10: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 11: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center, 12: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 13: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 16: The total number of fire extinguishers required for a light hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3,000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "all purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. The travel distance to any extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 14: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 15: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 17: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 18: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 19: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 20: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 21: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.9.1) 22: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 23: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.6) 24: Aisles and aisle access ways serving as a portion of the exit access in the means of egress system shall comply with the requirements of this section. Aisles or aisle access ways shall be provided from all occupied portions of the exit access which contain seats, tables, furnishings, displays and similar fixtures or equipment. The required width of aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1017.1) 25: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on-site generator. (IFC 1011.6.3) 26: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1006.3.1) 30: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 28: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 27: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 31: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2437. 33: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 32: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 34: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 35: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 36: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.9 of the International Building Code. 29: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 37: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 38: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL" 1400 FIRE FINAL 0409 FRAMING 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING 0` CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov SITE LOCATION Building Permit No. [_��9 to— Project No. Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: —9 —t ttQ use CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. "Please Print" Site Address: 645 Andover Park West King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Suite Number: Bldg 7 Floor: 1 and 2 Tenant Name: CEC Corporation, Sanford -Brown College PROPERTY OWNER Name: Chelsea Gaskill Address: 635 Andover Park West, Suite 107 City: Tukwila State: WA Zip: 98188 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: Steve Goff Address: 14432 SE Eastgate Way Suite 230 City: Bellevue State: WA Zip: 98007 Phone: 425-766-6338 Fax: Email: sgoff@swinerton.com GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: Swinerton Address: 14432 SE Eastgate Way, Suite 230 City: Bellevue State: WA Zip: 98007 Phone: (425) 283-5183 Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: 12/31/2016 Tukwila Business License No.: BUS -0996242 New Tenant: ❑ .....Yes m..No ARCHITECT OF RECORD Company Name: IA Interior Architects Architect Name: Jeffrey Miller Address: 1001 4th Ave. Suite 440 City: Seattle State: WA Zip: 98154 Phone: (206) 264-9195 Fax: Email: j.miller@interiorarchitects.com ENGINEER OF RECORD Company Name: Engineer Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Email: LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: 10 21 r� Address: z31 1,4. Mnj-i'n!�sde rZozA City: 5 State: 1 L Zip: 6O/ ►J H:\Applications\Fo=-Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsTmnit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 Pagel of 4 bh BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATIOi. — 206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ Est $500,000 Existing Building Valuation: $ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): Demolition and construction of (2) floor interior partitions, suspended ceiling (Existing to Remain), Patch and Repair and interior finishes. Alterations to mechanical/electrical/data cabling system will be issued under a separate permit. Scope does not include alterations to the building envelope. Will there be new rack storage? ❑..... Yes m.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? EI ....... Yes ❑....... No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: ® ....... Sprinklers ...... Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ .......None ❑ .......Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? E] ....... Yes �... . No If "yes, attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2 " x 11 "paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ ....... On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:WppliwtiornslFom-Appliwtiom On LinA2011 Applications\Pc it Application Raised - 8-9-11.docx Raised: August 2011 Page 2 of 4 bh Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC In Floor 10,000 10,000 2nd Floor 10,000 10,000 3rd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? EI ....... Yes ❑....... No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: ® ....... Sprinklers ...... Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ .......None ❑ .......Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? E] ....... Yes �... . No If "yes, attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2 " x 11 "paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ ....... On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:WppliwtiornslFom-Appliwtiom On LinA2011 Applications\Pc it Application Raised - 8-9-11.docx Raised: August 2011 Page 2 of 4 bh PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFOru4ATION — 206-433-0179 ' Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District ❑ ...Tukwila El ... Water District #125 ❑ .. Highline El.. Renton ❑ ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑... Valley View ❑ . Renton R • ❑ .. Seattle ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate El ... Sewer Availability Provided Septic System: ❑ On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑,... Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑'... Hold Harmless — (SAO) ❑... Hold Harmless — (ROW) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way ❑ Non Right-of-way ❑ ❑ ...Total Cut cubic yards ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑ ...Traffic Control ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection _ Irrigation Domestic Water El.. Work in Flood Zone ❑ .. Storm Drainage ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Pavement Cut El.. Looped Fire Line ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... I IWO # ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size.. 11WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size............ 19WO # ❑ ...Deduct Water Meter Size " ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension.............Public ❑ Private ❑ ❑ ...Water Main Extension.............Public ❑ Private ❑ FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line _ ❑ ...Water ❑ ...Sewer Monthly Service Billing to: Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Day Telephone: Mailing City Water Meter Refund/Billing: Day Telephone: Mailing City WApplicationsTor ts-Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsTertnit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh State zip State zip Page 3 of4 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED Date: 2/8/16 Print Name: Steven Goff' Day Telephone: 425-766-6338 Mailing Address: 14432 SE Eastagte Way Suite 230 Bellevue WA 98007 City State Zip H:Wpplications\Forn -Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsT—it Application Revised - 8-9-1 Ldocx Revised: August 2011 Page 4 of 4 bh DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $5,161.68 D16-0032 Address: 645 ANDOVER PARK W Apn: 2623049143 $5,161.68 DEVELOPMENT $4,916.10 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $4,911.60 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 6640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $245.58 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL14 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $245.58 $5,161.68 Date Paid: Tuesday, April 26, 2016 Paid By: STEVEN GOFF Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 00251D Printed: Tuesday, April 26, 2016 10:45 AM 1 of 1 OrpFif fsrsrenns Date Paid: Tuesday, February 09, 2016 Paid By: STEVEN GOFF Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 05674D Printed: Tuesday, February 09, 2016 1:54 PM 1 of 1 RWSYSTEMS INSPECTION RECORD (� Retain a copy with permit J INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Proj Typepection: Address: -yam �-Ie 9W tj Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wand Z� a. p. 111equestfr: Phone No: ® Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD IP(6 ��Z Retain a copy with permit SPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pro'el 4t_ Typ of f `ns ection /� a Ad�1 u[s�w-i . � Date Calleb: Special Instructions:`� AAA Date Wanted: a.m. b — p.m. 11 Requester: Phone No: RApproved per applicable codes. E Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: �y� i- Datey� REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. C— INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit pi6� INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pro'ect: Type of Ipspe '� : Address:�60Q- (�` ' Date C II d: Special Instructions: t_ A, Date Wantfc a.m. p.m. Re uester: c Phone No. % —6 U Approved per applicable codes. 11 Corrections required prior to approval. F] REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permitV1 �-6032- I TION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request line (206) 438-9350 PrMcype �r 1-- Co P- f G�tQ� of Inspection: Ades A/)� ate ailed: Special Instructions: 5'e— Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Re�qu�ester: v Phone No: 01 FlApproved per applicable codes. D -Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date: �J ,r 4 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ro, -37) INSPECTION RECORD I'P14-603z- Retain a copy with permit INSPEC110IN N0. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Protect: C-F�+,� /) Type of Insp coon: A/ldr !7 6 er &t Date Called: Special Instructions:: 1 Date W me a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. 11 Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: t��-Date: 6 — �4 1 �I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION N0, PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type pf inspection: f A dress: f Date Calledt Special Instructions: Date Wan d:a.m. -2 � p.m. Re ester: , f Phone 7 r6 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. C -e-( 4 r nspector: �/j� � Date REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. ra INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 0 z' SPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: GFS Type of Inspection: tit [4u f LAq Address: Otter Coe -01 Date Called: ecial n tractions: G v R"00MS+ �C•�l A� � V OOOIV +1 Colotk�� V- L lI � \ Date Wanted: a.m. .5—�- 1� p.m. 2- Requester: Phone No: L _.J Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: n 6 �-o v e r. Inspector: Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD 0� — C'}c I/ Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project`- --,� Type of Insp_ec ion: �-- Address: Contact Person: Suite #: . Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Phone No.: YFApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. t COMMENTS: lvA 5 5 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: U $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. tsming waaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Needs Shift Inspection: 5 nnklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: INSPECTION RECORD Dlb - 00 3cO,-- Retain a copy with permit /A , c - O !�� INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: r I' J I,;\fs �vq Type of Inspection: j P< ­'D u -er— Address: y S' il,PL--/ Contact Person: Suite #: Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. �-Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 01 tN aQ (v,,, S Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: Hrs.: ❑ $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance -Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 PERMIT COO RD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D16-0032 PROJECT NAME: CEC CORPORATION DATE: 02/09/16 SITE ADDRESS: 645 ANDOVER PARK W X Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: AT &C ,fin PONO ��� v MIA Building Division Fire Prevention Planning Division Public Works Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 02/11/16 Not Applicable ❑ Structural Review Required ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 03/10/16 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Denied ❑ (ie: Zoning Issues) DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 SWINERTON BUILDERS Home 1spaiiol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance Washington State Department of 4j Labor & Industries SWINERTON BUILDERS Owner or tradesperson Principals RAFFERTY, GARY JOSEPH, PRESIDENT SCHOWALTER, LINDA GERTRUDE, VICE PRESIDENT FOELLMER, JR, FRANK, VICE PRESIDENT ADAIR, DONALD DEAN, VICE PRESIDENT FOSTER, ERIC MICHAEL, VICE PRESIDENT HOLDEN, ANDREW C, VICE PRESIDENT RE, MICHAEL, VICE PRESIDENT MANNING, DAVID R (End: 01/01/1980) GRUBB, DAVID H, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER (End: 03/04/2004) RECOB, JEFFREY D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) URRUTIA, JOSE, R, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) FOELLMER, FRANK JR, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) HOLDEN, ANDREW C, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) ADAIR, DONALD D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) BEYER, DANIEL B, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) DAY, CHRISTOPHER J, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) HOOPES, JEFFREY C, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) RAFERTY, GARY J, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) SCHNELL, KEITH T, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) FOSTER, ERIC M, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) BERNICA, MICHAEL F, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) OTT, KEVIN L, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) ELSEA, GREGORY A, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) 260 TOWNSEND ST SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94107-1790 415-984-1248 Page 1 of 5 Search L&I A-7.lndex Help my L&1 Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing https:Hsecure.Ini.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=409013296&LIC=SWINEB*992DR&SAW= 4/26/2016 SWINERTON BUILDERS DYSART, W J "JACK", VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) WHALEY, KURT D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) SCHOWALTER, LINDA GERTRUDE, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/05/2005) CATEL, MARK S, SECRETARY (End: 08/05/2005) SWINERTON, W A, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 08/29/1988) ELSNER, PAUL A, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 10/02/1991) SWINERTON, JAMES B, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 11/30/1997) CAPENER, JOHN T, PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) HIGGINS JR, DAVID M, PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) SUNDGREN, DONALD ERIC, PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) ARGILLA, LUKE P, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) KUFFNER, CHARLES P, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) MARKS, GORDON W, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) VANDERBERG, ROBERT P, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) BLANKE, EDWARD E, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) WILLIAM, JOHN D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) PEARSON, LINDA T, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) JOHNSON, STEVEN L, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) CALLIS, DAVID C, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) EHARA, GEORGE S, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) ATKINSON, KERRY M, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) WILLIAMSON, GEORGE A, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) SOTEROPULOS, GUST D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) KIMBERLY, D G, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) FARRELL, JAMES E, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) PAYNE, MARK E, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) Page 2 of 5 https://secure.ini.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=409013296&LIC=SWINEB*992DR&SAW= 4/26/2016 SWINERTON BUILDERS WERMERSKIRCHEN, DAVID L, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) STEVENSON, IVAN G, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) SCHNELL, KEITH T, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) HADLER, STANISLAW WACLAW, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) EHARA, GEORGE S, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) MONTOYA, RONALD ANTHONY, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) RECOB, JEFFRY D, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/07/2012) MURPHY, SHERRIANN, SECRETARY (End: 12/07/2012) CHAPMAN, JOHN BRYAN, SECRETARY (End: 12/07/2012) GRAY, LYN M, SECRETARY (End: 12/07/2012) MOY, RODNEY R, SECRETARY (End: 12/07/2012) GILLETE, JAMES R, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER (End: 12/07/2012) BRINKHOFF, RANDALL DEAN, CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER (End: 12/07/2012) SMITH, HOWARD, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/15/1995) DUGGAN, LAWRENCE J, VICE PRESIDENT (End: 12/31/1998) Doing business as SWINERTON BUILDERS WA UBI No, 409 013 296 License Business type Corporation Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor Active. .......................................... Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. SWINEB*992DR Effective — expiration 03/19/2001-12128/2016 Bond .:............... LIBERTY MUTUAL INS CO $12,000.00 Bond account no. 070002363 Received by L&I Effective date 05/16/2005 04/16/2005 Expiration date Until Canceled https://secure.Ini.wa. gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=409013 296&LIC=SWINEB * 992DR&SAW= Page 3 of 5 4/26/2016 SWINERTON BUILDERS $2,000,000.00 Insurance ............... ............. Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance $2,000,000.00 Policy no. Effective date g10023224700 08/01/2014 Received by L&I Effective date 04/18/2016 02101/2016 Expiration date 08/01/2017 Westchester Fire Insurance Com $2,000,000.00 Policy no. G24306549004 Received by L&I Effective date 07/20/2015 08/01/2014 Expiration date 08/01/2016 Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance $1,000,000.00 Policy no. WA266DO66493015 Received by L&I 07/20/2015 Effective date 08/01/2014 Expiration date 08/01/2016 Liberty Mutual Fire Insurance $2,000,000.00 Policy no. AS2661066493025 Received by L&I 07/20/2015 Insurance history Savings ......................... No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. Lawsuits against the bond or savings ... ............................................................................................................... Cause no. 12-2-15059-1 SEA Complaint filed by RJL STRUCTURAL INC Complaint date 04/26/2012 Effective date 08/01/2014 Expiration date 08/01/2016 Dismissed ................................ Complaint against bond(s) or savings 070002363 Complaint amount $0.00 L&I Tax debts .......................................... No L&I tax debts are recorded for this contractor license during the previous 6 year period, but some debts may be recorded by other agencies. License Violations ......_................................................ No license violations during the previous 6 year period. Workers' comp Do you know if the business has employees? If so, verify the business is up-to-date on workers' comp premiums This company has multiple workers' comp accounts. Active accounts L&I Account ID Account is current. 169,304-03 ................................. Page 4 of 5 https:Hsecure.Ini.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=409013296&LIC=SWINEB*992DR&SAW= 4/26/2016 SWINERTON BUILDERS Doing business as SWINERTON BUILDERS Estimated workers reported Quarter 4 of Year 2015 "76 to 100 Workers" L&I account representative T01 KRISTINE HATHAWAY (360)902-4811 - Email: HATK235@lni.wa.gov Track this contractor Workplace safety and health Check for any past safety and health violations found on jobsites this business was responsible for Inspection results date 02/05/2016 No violations Inspection no. 317939099 Location 3306 NW 319th St Ridgefield, WA 98642 Inspection results date 01/27/2016 Inspection no. 317939027 Location 580 Fort Rd Toppenish, WA 98948 Inspection results date 11/27/2013 Inspection no. 316906718 Location 1224 NE 8th St. Bellevue, WA 98005 No violations No violations Washington State Dept. of Labor & Industries. Use of this site is subject to the laws of the state of Washington. https://secure.Ini.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=409013296&LIC=S WINEB * 992DR&SAW= Page 5 of 5 4/26/2016 d-- I 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES' SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES LEM AL - CA,PdT_R 1.1 SUPPLEMENTS, GENERAL PART 1- GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL A. The General Conditions of the Contract is the IA version of American Institute of Architects' AIA Document A201, "General 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 1997 Edition Articles 1 through 14 inclusive is made a part of the Contract A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Documents with the same force and effect as though set forth in full. Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Specification Sections, apply to this Section. LDUCATIONN B. The Contractor shall, as a condition of the Contract, obtain the IA version of AIA Document A201, shall be versed with the 1.2 SUMMARY 1.2 SUMMARY Articles contained therein, and shall notify and apprise all subcontractors and any other appropriate parties to the Contract or A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop C OR P 0 R A T f O N individuals or agencies engaged on the work as to its contents. B. Related Requirements: Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. C. No contractual adjustments shall be due contractors or subcontractors, or both become exigent as a result of failure on the part of 1. Section 012100 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 1.3 DEFINITIONS the Contractor or subcontractors or both to fully acquaint themselves with the conditions of the IA version of AIA 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action Document A201. 3. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." A. 1.2 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 01 listed manufacturers. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. >row -en..... .. ........._ A. Where provisions of General Conditions relate to project administrative or work-related requirements of the Contract, those 1.3 DEFINITIONS Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals Indicated in. ..........�� ............ .. . paragraphs are expanded in Division 01, General Requirements of the Specifications. A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract individual Specification Sections as Informational submittals. B. Bidding documents, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements contain information Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in necessary for completion of every part of project. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as a device -independent and display resolution -independent fixed -layout document format. C. Every item of work performed under a subcontract is subject to the above conditions and requirements. unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1.3 DEFINITIONS 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction A. The term "product" includes materials, systems and equipment. requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include B. The terms "approved," "directed," "required," "ordered," "designated," "acceptable" and "satisfactory" shall mean written action on 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and C C SIP3 SEATTLE the part of the Architect. A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to reviewing submittals required by those corrections. C. The Term "Owner" is defined as IA's client whose name appears in the IA Title block on each Architectural Drawing. Title block be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS CO INS0 L I D ATI indicates Hawthorne Plaza Associates, LLC. Project management is provided by Hines. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided by Architect. A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's D. The term "Substantially Complete" as used in this document shall be understood to include completion of each phase of the entire 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: use in preparing submittals. project in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents except minor items which will not interfere with complete and a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop intended use of the premises. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction Drawings and Project record drawings. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to A. Contractor agrees to bind in writing all subcontractors and materials suppliers in terms of General and Supplementary Conditions c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include the Contract Drawings. BUILD111MG 7 of the Contract for Construction and to terms of entire agreement between Owner and Contractor. annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Revit. 1.5 BUILDING MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of IA's Electronic Media Agreement. 645 A 0 V`' ERRh PARK A. All work performed in connection with this project shall be coordinated and carried out in compliance with the requirements of the indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: Building Management. Such requirements include, but are not limited to: d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 1) Floor plans. WEST 1. Building access, delivery, use of loading dock. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. 2. Work affecting other tenants. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. THURKWILA,98188 3. Protection and cleaning. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of 1. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related 4. Working hours and required after-hours work. architects and owners. submittals are received. 5. Security requirements. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 6. Garbage removal. requirements indicated. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: ��� REGISTERED 7. Site work. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single ► '� R ECT 8. Modifications to building services including HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Building Management System and j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. Life Safety System, and commissioning, testing and inspection thereof. Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. FRE 8 MILLER 9. Miscellaneous building standard details, products, means and methods. within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number. STAT F ASHINGTON 1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities A. Owner acknowledges Architect shall have no responsibility for the discovery, removal, presence, handling, disposal of, or k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. exposure of persons to hazardous substances materials and wastes in any form at the Project Site, including but not limited to asbestos, I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with asbestos products, PCB, Mold, or other toxic substances. indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. approval notation from Architect's action stamp. B. The Owner shall retain an independent consultant who is trained and experienced in identification and survey of existing sites prior m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure to start of work. of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.7 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 5 days of 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements for Project Data and Shop Drawings: Prepare and submit submittals required by and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information days of receipt of request, or five days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. furnished by the Owner, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are changes in the Work. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. file. inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements information in such form as the Architect may require. A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. B. Any design errors, conflicts or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 2.2 DELEGATED -DESIGN SERVICES prior to start of work, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and and design criteria indicated. regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS B. Delegated -Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit 1.8 DOCUMENTS AT THE SITE 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. C. BIM File Incorporation: Incorporate delegated -design drawing and data files into Building Information Model established for record copy of Architect reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the Project. available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with 1.9 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS these requirements: PART 3 - EXECUTION A. In addition to the Material Safety and Data Sheets listed in junction with LEED credits, provide MSDS's for traditional purposes a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW including but not limited to materials, finishes and products that contain hazardous substances, separate from LEED. b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for C. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. submitting to Architect. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. involved. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. C. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. Delta Issue Nr. Description Date 1AINTERIOR. ARCHITECTS S EATT L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CON N`�-- THE - ^== THE ARCHITECT. IREVIEVVED MR R CODE COM LKNICE APPROVED I4AR 2 5 201E Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval;: City d Twkv II@ Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Scale T 7 ' I'tD'� DI�a° �I0 IA`W 1 o RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 09 2016 Title: ECIFICATI® S PERMIT CENTER Sheet 2 V N . 6 s 2 N SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS R A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Contract Documents. Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and 2. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract 4. Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. E. agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry 5. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its 1. construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. and 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org. recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the 7. recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 4. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 5. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 6. AISC -American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 7. AITC -American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 8. ANSI -American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 9. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 10. ARI - Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 11. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 12. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 13. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 14. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 15. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 16. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); www.astm.org. 17. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 18. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 19. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 20. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood -Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com. 21. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 22. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 23. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 24. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 25. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 26. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 27. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 28. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 29. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 30. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 31. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 32. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 33. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 34. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 35. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 36. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 37. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 38. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 39. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 40. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 41. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 42. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 43. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 44. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 45. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 46. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 47. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 48. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 49. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 50. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 51. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 52. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 53. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.mapiefloor.org. 54. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 55. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 56. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 57. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com. 58. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 59. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 60. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 61. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 62. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 63. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 64. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 65. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 66. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 67. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 68. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 69. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org. 70. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 71. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 72. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhia.com. 73. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 74. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 75. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 76. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 77. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 78. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 79. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 80. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 81. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 82. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org. 83. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 84. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 85. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 86. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com. 87. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 88. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 89. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 90. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 91. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 92. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 93. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 94. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 95. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 96. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 97. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com. 98. TMS -The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 99. TRI -Tile Roofing Institute; (Formerly: National Tile Roofing Manufacturing Association); www.tileroofing.org. 100. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 101. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 102. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 103. 104. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Associations www.wdma.com_ 105. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org. 106. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA). 107. WSRCA -Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 108. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. . 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturers product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owners construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractors convenience will not be considered. 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner- accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire -rated construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 01 8113.1 3 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations," Section 018113.16 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Commercial Interiors," Section 018113.19 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Core and Shell Development," and Section 018113.23 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Schools." B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water- service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. K. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. E. Waste Disposal: Comply with local green building ordinance written requirements. F. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder otthe construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. G. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. �; i3Ir I 110 :T9011,011AN S� �� , '111 �_ I oil � , WEST THUNKWILA, WA 98188 O REGISTERED G AT F ASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE 1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. R 2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. IT 3. ICC -ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 2. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 3. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 4. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 5. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. FED -STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 3. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dia.mil. 4. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 5. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.agmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry; http://txforestservice.tamu.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 21 00 "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 4. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. . 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturers product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of -design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owners construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractors convenience will not be considered. 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner- accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 5. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire -rated construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 01 8113.1 3 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations," Section 018113.16 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Commercial Interiors," Section 018113.19 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Core and Shell Development," and Section 018113.23 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for Schools." B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water- service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. K. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. E. Waste Disposal: Comply with local green building ordinance written requirements. F. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder otthe construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. G. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. �; i3Ir I 110 :T9011,011AN S� �� , '111 �_ I oil � , WEST THUNKWILA, WA 98188 O REGISTERED G AT F ASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE R IOR ARCH IT ECTS S E ATT t_ E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R I O R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE W95 EN_CONSENT OF ,m „_,y�,� THE ARCHITECT. RE`l IE"V E D F0� �°i CODE CO�flPi-1A110E ViAP, 2 5 2016 1 Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Cit;Tu at�ila Job No: 05CEC0.0193.000 SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATC H I N G PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated construction. 1.3 . DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load - deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire -suppression systems. 4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5. Control systems. 6. Communication systems. 7. Conveying systems. 8. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain -wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. B. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of hazardous waste. 2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphalt paving. b. Concrete. C. Concrete reinforcing steel. d. Brick. e. Concrete masonry units. f. Wood studs. g. Wood joists. h. Plywood and oriented strand board. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood trim. k. Structural and miscellaneous steel. I. Rough hardware. M. Roofing. n. Insulation. o. Doors and frames. P. Door hardware. q. Windows. r. Glazing. S. Metal studs. t. Gypsum board. U. Acoustical tile and panels. V. Carpet. W. Carpet pad. X. Demountable partitions. Y. Equipment. Z. Cabinets. aa. Plumbing fixtures. bb. Piping. cc. Supports and hangers. dd. Valves. ee. Sprinklers. ff. Mechanical equipment. gg. Refrigerants. hh. Electrical conduit. H. Copper wiring. jj. Lighting fixtures. kk. Lamps. II. Ballasts. mm. Electrical devices. nn. Switchgear and panelboards. oo. Transformers. 2. Construction Waste: a. Masonry and CMU. b. Lumber. c. Wood sheet materials. d. Wood trim. e. Metals. f. Roofing. g. Insulation. h. Carpet and pad. i. Gypsum board. j. Piping. k. Electrical conduit. I. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area [on-site] [off-site] [designated by Owner]. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. D. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. F. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. G. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL-CONT'D 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. B. Metals: Separate metals by type. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. E. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals. F. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. G. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive. 1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. H. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. I. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on- site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.." Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. Contractoras List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect and / or Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 2. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format. PDF electronic file. Architect, will return annotated file. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS -37, or if GS -37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned -out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER • 10131TV 0, s %_ REGISTERED v 1�I- B. MILLER 'ASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE R IOR ARCH IT ECTS S EATT L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Title: EC I F' CTI Sheet:AN R 1 �E: yn r, � C� ry�nn MfF`,4 2 5 2013 Mb! O.. Tul-ooaila PBUILDINNIG DIVI,'1;i 1A SECTION 017839 - PROJECT' RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Final Submittal: 1) Submit record digital data files. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: DWF and PDF electronic files, Microsoft Windows operating system. 2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. P 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA -approved certification program. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner may occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. SECTION 024213 - RECLAMATION OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions -1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes complete reclamation of recycled ceiling panels as follows: 1. Reclamation Plan for acoustical ceiling panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Incorporate ceilings into the project site Waste Management Plan as a material to be recycled. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials Acceptable for Recycling: 1. All brands of dry, pulpable mineral fiber ceiling panels or tiles. All metal splines must be removed from tiles (12"x12"). 2. All brands of dry fiberglass panels (foil -back case by case). Facing must be easily removable. 3.Any vinyl or scrim -faced mineral fiber panels. B. Materials Acceptable for Recycling Case -by Case 1. Foil -backed ceiling tiles. 2. Any vinyl or scrim -faced fiberglass panels. 3. Ceiling tiles with dark or metallic paint (applied by manufacturer). 4. Ceiling tiles with paint not applied by manufacturer. 5. Mineral fiber or fiberglass wall panels. 6. Fabric -faced ceiling tiles. 7. Cast ceiling panels (with or without foil). 8. Fully packaged ceiling tiles meeting the above criteria. C. Materials Not Acceptable for Recycling: 1. Asbestos containing ceiling tiles, Ceiling tiles installed below friable asbestos or contaminated with any other hazardous material. 2. Red or pink -backed ceiling tiles. 3. Wet, moldy or weathered ceiling tiles. 4. Ceiling tiles or pallets/boxes/bales which contain visible debris (garbage, construction waste). 5. Ceiling tiles not packaged according to Armstrong Specifications. 6. Any gypsum ceiling or board. 7. Ceiling tiles with visible wood pulp. 8. Glue -up or adhesive ceiling tiles. 9. Roll -offs which contain debris. 10. Baled fiberglass, vinyl -faced, fabric, scram faced or foil -backed ceiling tiles. D. Ceiling material being reclaimed may not come into contact with asbestos containing material, hazardous waste materials or special waste. If the area where ceilings are being removed is or has gone through abatement procedures, verification that ceilings did not come in contact with asbestos containing material is required. E. Ceiling material being reclaimed must be kept dry and free from debris. F. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling demolition work with contractors doing related work in the building including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULING, PACKAGING AND SHIPPING PROCEDURES A. Full Truckload Palletized Procedure: 1. Contractor to supply pallets, metal bands, stretch wrap. 2. Approved ceiling materials will be palletized in a manner allowing both secure shipment by trailer and the ability to safely inspect and unload the trailers' contents. 3. Pallets must be kept dry. Wet material is not acceptable and will be returned. Pallets must be labeled per Armstrong requirements. B. On-site Roll -Off Procedure: a. No wood, metal, construction debris, trash or hazardous materials of any kind can be included. b. Material should be placed in a roll -off container. This container must have a water impermeable cover such that material inside do not get wet. Material should not be loaded above the top of the container SECTION 054000 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior non -load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior Ceiling joist framing. 3. Interior Soffit framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold -formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold- formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency and as required by local jurisdiction for both gravity and lateral force restraint. 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power -actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold -formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Cold -Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 2. Headers: AISI S212. 3. Lateral Design: AISI S213. C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 COLD -FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25percent. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated. 2.3 INTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as shown on drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as shown on drawings. C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure. 2.4 INTERIOR CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Anchor clips. 4. End clips. 5. Gusset plates. 6. Hole reinforcing plates. 7. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel and carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC -ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC -ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -tapping, steel drill screws. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold -formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold -formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to -line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). B. Install cold -formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed steel framing members by screw fastening. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold -formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints D. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. E. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.2 INTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.3 CEILING JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Drawings. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel -stud sections as indicated on Drawings. C. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. D. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist -framing assembly. SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling -hung toilet compartments. 2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 4. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 5. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 6. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 7. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 8. Shelf angles. 9. Miscellaneous steel trim 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941 M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Low -Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate free, universal modifiedalkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. C. Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. D. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc -coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. As -Fabricated Finish: AA -M12. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, AA-Ml2C22A41. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, and other connectors. D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 • L..►1 V«Y .. 1 `40� L REGISTERED ,/E ff R B. MILLER ATE' F ASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE RIO R ARCH IT ECTS S EATT L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 1 N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 con"ScAled4 r,r-1h2, fl tk -avis LNi_kdf w i 6P' ,Q = 2016 Gigs of � wvr iia SILNNS !%G DDI gc3g ,,n Title: S C' F' CAT ® 9 s PERMIT CENTER i 8 3 Y: _ _ SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood furring 2. Utility shelving. 3. Solid Wood Blocking 4. Plywood backing panels. 5. Fire Retardant Treaded Wood. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate componentmaterials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer andcertification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardanttreated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction thatperiodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying withrequirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spreadindex of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significantprogressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. 2.2 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal thickness. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of Sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire -retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- (19 -by -38 -mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) 400 mm o.c. SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior trim, including non -fire -rated interior door and sidelight frames. 2. Fire -rated interior door and sidelight frames. 3. Interior plywood 4. Shelving. 5. Interior railings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. 2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply with testing requirements; testing by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent respectively. C. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 FIRE -RATED INTERIOR DOOR AND SIDELIGHT FRAMES A. Frames, complete with casings, fabricated from fire -retardant particleboard, or from solid fire -retardant -treated wood. Frames shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 2.4 SHELVING A. Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime -painted formed steel. Shelf Brackets without Rod Support: BHMA Al 56.16, B04041; prime -painted formed steel. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; zin( plated steel. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; zinc -plated steel. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; zinc -plated steel. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091; zinc -plated steel. Clothes Rods: 1 -5/16 -inch- (33 -mm-) diameter, chrome -plated -steel tubes. 2.5 RAILINGS A. Interior Railings: Clear, kiln -dried red oak or similar of pattern indicated, either solid or laminated. B. Balusters: Clear, kiln -dried, red oak, or similar turned balusters of pattern and size indicated. C. Newel Posts: Clear, kiln -dried, red oak or similar.turned newel posts of pattern and size indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch (0.8 -mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 3.4 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and sand exposed ends smooth. B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Use 2 fasteners at each framing member or fastener location for cleats 4 inches nominal (89 mm actual) in width and wider. C. Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 32 inches (800 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. D. Install standards for adjustable shelf supports according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. Space fasteners not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. E. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. and within 6 inches (150 mm) of end of shelves. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors. 3.5 RAILING INSTALLATION A. Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel posts and to trim at walls with countersunk - head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue. Assemble railings at goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory - applied finishes, if any. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic -laminate -faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemicaltreatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic- laminate cabinets. 2. Apply Architectural Woodwork Standards Quality Certification Program label to ShopDrawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C). C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constructionress ro to avoid delaying the Work. P 9 Y 9 D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installedas indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural WoodworkStandards" for grades of architectural plastic - laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Certified Wood: Plastic -laminate cabinets shall be made from wood products certified as "FSC Pure" according to FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD -40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." D. Type of Construction: As shown on drawings. E. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: As shown on drawings. Reveal Dimension: As shown on drawings. F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. G. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. H. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As shown on drawings. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with. fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire -retardant -treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame -spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. C. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire -retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets as shown on drawings. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire -retardant -treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sand fire -retardant -treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. C. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. D. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. B. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniformappearance.Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following: Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fireresistance rating. Applicable fire -resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire - resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. Treatment of fireproofing after application. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 44 deg F (7 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced -air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire -resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 2.2 SPRAYED FIRE -RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's standard, factory -mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire -resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application. 1. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes. Color of Topcoat: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire -resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Primer's bond strength in required fire -resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736. C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire -resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon -fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire -resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire -resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment. G. Sealer: Transparent -drying, water -dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire -resistance design. H. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire -resistance design. 1. Cement -Based Topcoat: Factory -mixed, cementitious hard -coat formulation for trowel or spray application over SFRM. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire -resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. Prime substrates where included in fire -resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. B. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fireresistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire -resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated. C. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire -resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. D. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER �94001A REGISTERED ll F3rWITECT Ykff. MILLER WASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date IN T E RI OR ARCH ITE CTS S EATTL E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: p Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 ,BSc to 7_1 2 , � X1'=0" F a City O w BUILDING;, E'IVgS-1110iN � + lie SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire -resistance -rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. . Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire -protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permittl by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg (2.49 Pa). C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg (2.49 Pa). D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. E. W -Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. Low -Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 2.2 FILL MATERIALS A. Latex Sealants: Single -component latex formulations that do not re -emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. B. Firestop Devices: Factory -assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. C. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum -foil -faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized -steel sheet. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single -component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. F. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. G. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat -expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral -fiber, water -insoluble expansion agents, and fire -retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel -reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. H. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. I. Silicone Sealants: Single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.3 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been Corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and th would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately c out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. SECTION 078446 - FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire -resistance -rated constructions. . 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each fire -resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire -resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's fire -protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire -resistance -rated assembly. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire -resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire -resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire -resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Install and cure fire -resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced- air circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire -resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire -resistive joint systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire -resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire- resistive joint systems are installed. Fire -resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire -Resistance -Rated Construction: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01 -inch wg (2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307. Fire -Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of the floor assembly. D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire -resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. L -Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Fire -Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. Low -Emitting Materials: Fire -resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." G. Accessories: Provide components of fire -resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire -resistive joint systems to comply with fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire -resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire -resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire -resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire -resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire -resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (1 50 mm) of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self -adhering -type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Fire -Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or fire -resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire -resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire -resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire -resistive joints stems are without p 9 1 Y damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire -resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire -resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Joints between different materials listed above. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Tile control joints. h. Joints in stone paving i. Joints between different materials listed above. j. Other joints as indicated. k. Existing base building concealed non-compliant as built field conditions 3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated. 4. Silicone joint sealants. 5. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 6. Butyl joint sealants. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:When ambient and substrate temperature p 1 9 p conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING joint A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other � fillers; , and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 1. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: 2. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint- sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates. Record test results in a field -adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field -Adhesion -Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow -metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance ratings, temperature -rise ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal -edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. . 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow -metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow -metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. Store hollow- metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4 -inch- (102 -mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings and temperature -rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft -Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. 2.3 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate - free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field - applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Factory Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard two -coat, baked -on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, complying with SDI A250.3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repalred area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nuntemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow -metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Factory -Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER i T 3 • 1 s; � TUKWILA, WA 98188 9400' ----'"' *I.- REGISTERED J 0131FR Yjb MILLER STAT O WASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date IN C. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. E d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. IOR e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. ITE f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber insulation. 6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In -Place Metal Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Factory -Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER i T 3 • 1 s; � TUKWILA, WA 98188 9400' ----'"' *I.- REGISTERED J 0131FR Yjb MILLER STAT O WASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date IN T E R IOR ARCH ITE CTS S E ATT I- E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 1 N T E R I 0 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Title: SPECIFIC ivli' R 2 v 20 j 6 City 0f I1l11-,, I BUILrDNNIG 00`VI,310Pe. Sheet:AN=2u"" SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall -opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. C. Samples for Verification: For interior aluminum frames, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Framing Member: 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Corner Fabrication: l2 -by -12 -inch- (300 -by -300 -mm-) long, full-size window corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory -applied color finish. D. Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire - protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. B. Smoke- and Draft -Control Assemblies: Where indicated, provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Air leakage rate in subparagraph below is the most stringent required by NFPA 105; retain rate or revise to suit Project. Verify requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3 -inch wg (75 Pa) of water. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver interior aluminum frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. Store interior aluminum frames under cover at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. 90 -Minute Fire -Protection Rating: Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with a cold -formed, primed, interior steel Iiner.Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire -rated gaskets 2.3 FABRICATION A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-Ml2C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates. At fire -protection- rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to NFPA 80 B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches (2450 mm) long must be one piece. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48 -inch (1220 -mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap -in or trim members. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. 3.3 CLEANING A_ Clean expnsed frame surfares promptly after installation, using rleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1220 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 0 a N SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer faces 2. Shop priming and Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 6. Fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. B. Low -Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C. D. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. Fabricate door and transom panels with full -width, solid -lumber meeting rails. Provide factory -installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 2.3 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime faces and all four edges with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors.Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft -control doors according to NFPA 105. B. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, providel/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire- rated doors. C. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. C. Folding doors. 2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated. D. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft -control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. E. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. G. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's ADA Standards for Accessible Design for door hardware on doors in an accessible route. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor -recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. D. Electrical System Roughing -In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with requirements in this Section. 2.2 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. 2.3 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: BHMA Al 56.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame. 2.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full -exterior or full -interior type, as required by application indicated. 2.5 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA Al 56.29, Grade 1. 2.6 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA Al 56.16; minimum 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 2.7 AUTOMATIC AND SELF -LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS A. Automatic and Self -Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA Al 56.16; minimum 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) throw; designed for mortising into door edge. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 2.9 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 2.10 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active -leaf, hold -open lever and inactive -leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon -coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release; and with internal override. 2.11 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key - operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.12 CONCEALED CLOSERS A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key - operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.13 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke- detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system, loss of power. 2.14 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 2.15 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA Al 56.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 2.16 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA Al 56.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 2.17 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 2.18 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 2.19 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire -rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm). E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant. G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 AL ;idlM<; j T WEST TUKWILA, WA 98188 9400 REGISTERED ARCHITECT MILLER IHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date IN T E RIO R ARCH IT ECTS SE/\ -F -Fl E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CEC0.0193.000 Title: SCIFICA PERMIT CENTER Sheet s CODE OOINA PIANO JE MlA, v City c�FTu,�V�Vilo, II_ 1%,G DDIVISIOIN SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for interior windows, interior doors, interior borrowed lites, interior storefront framing 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses with reasonable tolerances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass, the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 1. Coated glass. 2. Laminated glass. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. D. Thickness: Glass thickness shall be determined by the manufacturer. 1.8 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -0. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. C. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 1.9 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1.10 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating- glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 1.2 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 2.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. D. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1 270 mm). 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. E. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. F. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. G. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. H. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 2.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 2.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 2.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period." Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 2 a.N 93 2 N SECTION 092'216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)] [Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)], hot -dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048- inch -(1.21 -mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. 2. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [1 0] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. A. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. C. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. D. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper -faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Low -Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X, Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. C. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. U -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. Glass -Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches (150 mm) in size. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension -system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them Ina fullye closed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory". 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Low -Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small- Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension -System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; [Form 1, nodular] [Form 2, water felted] [Form 4, cast or molded] 2. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane -faced overlay; Form 1, nodular; with [glass -fiber cloth] [washable vinyl -film] overlay. 3. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane -faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with [vinyl overlay on face] [vinyl overlay on face and back] [vinyl overlay on face, back, and sealed edges] [fiberglass -fabric overlay on face]. 4. Type and Form: Type XII, glass -fiber base with membrane -faced overlay; [Form 1, plastic] [Form 2, cloth] [Form 3, other]. 5. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral -base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 6. Type and Form: <Insert type and form>. 7. Pattern: [C (perforated, small holes)] [CD (perforated, small holes and fissured)] [CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured)] [D (fissured)] [E (lightly textured)] [F (heavily textured)] [G (smooth)] [GH (smooth and printed)] [I (embossed)] [J (embossed -in- register)] [K (surface scored)] [Z (other patterns as described)] [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] <Insert pattern>. C. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04 -inch- (1 -mm-) thick, galvanized -steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16 -inch- (8 -mm-) diameter bolts. D. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place. Hold -Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact -clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 2.4 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. B. Extruded -Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim- Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded -aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following: 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Fire -Rated Assembly: Install fire -rated ceiling systems according to tested fire -rated design. B. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or postinstalled anchors. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. D. Install suspension -system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension -system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension -system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER S ti _ 1. I-. __ —d„��1­1ao1 . .I::� ............ -i-:::::::::.:::::: .... ....... ..... I,:::::::::: ..... ** ...... ..'....* ....... **** ..... I ....... I ......... 1.i:.:::.:::::::* ........ ­* ** * ::::::::::.::::* ****I �:=::.:::::::�­.1.*..1 ..... * ... ­­**... ....... *1 .....I ,=.: * ,:::::�­ ... * ... '­*­ ........ *..* ............. 11I , , �; IN't 11 • t1111 4 i. •i If 'T"'145 ANDOVER PAR'Sk' lA is 98188 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date N::,m INTE RI OR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R I O R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Title: S CI ICATI sheet:AN�Zuo Ei1t! E '01� w d DDE C0 aEL IANC;E - �� A° PR ? 5' 20196 C i. 01 C :ric n"! f1. 1 IL°!,flag ,1114 SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 2. Rubber floor tile. 3. Vinyl composition floor tile. 4. Resilient terrazzo floor tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. Welded -Seam Samples: For seamless - installation technique indicated and for each flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6 -by -9 -inch (150 -by -230 -mm) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 5 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor -polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Joint Sealant for Resilient Terrazzo Floor Tile: Silicone sealant of type and grade recommended in writing by floor tile manufacturer to suit resilient terrazzo floor tile. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. B. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. C. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion -joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. D. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. E. Seamless Installation: 1. Heat -Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. 2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical -bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations. C. Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient terrazzo floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. a m N S3 O N SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carp tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. D. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. E. For painted subfloors, verify the following: 1. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. F. For raised access flooring systems, verify the following: 1. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any. 2. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of irregularities, gaps greater than 1/8 inch (3 mn protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet the installation. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet the manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet the to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Cast iron. 6. Galvanized metal. 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. 9. Plaster. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. E. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. D. Shop -Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -primed surfaces. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. C. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire -protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. b. Fire hose valves. C. Fire hoses and racks. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing -in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface -mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. 1. Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Shop Drawings: For fire -protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Product Schedule: For fire -protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or surface mounted. Coordinate final fire - protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.[ Use same designations indicated on Drawings.] 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of [fire extinguishers] [fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks] indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire -protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Rated Fire -Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire -resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher and hose valve where shown. B. Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet for non -rated locations. Steel sheet at rated enclosures. C. Recessed Cabinet: Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Surface -Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. F. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire -protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Finish fire -protection cabinets after assembly. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire - protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire -protection cabinets. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire -protection cabinets, square and plumb.ldentification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire -protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. Un completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire -protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire -protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. Replace fire - protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER } i �,Fall f , ,! .i y� 94400t REGISTERED '74 ARCHITECT P it- . Y B. MILLER O WASHINGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date IN T E RIO R ARCH ITECTS S E ATT L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 C.ODE OOs aP'L ! A N1 C EE: Title: SPECI'CA s o«. � a P i J aAR 2 r 2s•'0 10 CiYv TLR:4'n`?a o ma+ DIVIIZISNIO 1 SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC -LAMINATE -CLAD PART1 - GENERAL COUNTERTOPS `LJ 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 PART 1 - GENERAL LUUCATION Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification A. Section includes portable, hand -carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. Sections, apply to this Section. C;dRPO'RATYCON B. Owner -Furnished Material: Hand -carried fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Section includes plastic -laminate countertops. A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. A. Product Data: For each type of product, including high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and fire- retardant -treated materials. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical -treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. .. ' ' �a � 0 r `.. rown 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other ..... A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. components. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for as required installed in plastic -laminate countertops. Apply 1.6 COORDINATION AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire -protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. C. Samples for Verification: Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1.7 WARRANTY one sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to one edge. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation CEC SEATTLE PART 2 - PRODUCTS areas. If countertops must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. CONSOLIDATIOILI 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction authorities having jurisdiction. period. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes B. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with BOUILD111MG 7 required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked -enamel finish. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond 645APMOOVER'A PARK PART 3 - EXECUTION to established dimensions. WEST 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire PART 2 - PRODUCTS TRUOKWII A, WA 98188 extinguishers. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.1 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of construction, installation, and other requirements. authorities having jurisdiction. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. B. Grade: Custom. C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. '-"- STERED- D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces as shown on drawings: 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. HITECTSECTION ILPART *STAA SHINGTON KIT N NTRY E UIPMENT 114500 CHE / PA 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Sections, apply to this Section. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS 1.2 SUMMARY A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials, General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with A. This Section includes complete Kitchen / Pantry Equipment as follows: requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire -test -response characteristics specified 1. Microwave ovens. as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 2. Refrigerator/freezers. B. Fire -Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire -retardant 3. Dishwashers. chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25 or less per ASTM E 84. A. Certification Labels: Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and bears certification labels as follows: 2.4 ACCESSORIES B. Energy Ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. required by Federal Trade Commission. 2.5 FABRICATION C. UL Standards: Provide residential equipment with UL labels. A. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components D. ANSI Standards: Provide gaspburning residential equipment with American Gas Assoc. (AGA) seal of approval, complying with only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, ANSI Z21 OSeri es. trimming, and fitting. E. Uniformity: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of residential equipment required. B. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate 1.4 SUBMITTALS openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of residential equipment, edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. including data indicating compliance with requirements. Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential equipment. Schedule: Submit schedule of residential equipment, using same room designations shown on PART 3 - EXECUTION drawings. 3.1 INSTALLATION 1.5 SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. Field Jointing: A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment. Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project -site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate PART 2 - PRODUCTS field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 2.1 MANUFACTURER B. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of A. Subject to compliance of each equipment type requirements, provide products on one of the following: Bosch, General 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair Electric, Modern Maid damaged timet at cuts. 2.2 MATERIALS & FABRICATION C. Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire -retardant -treated wood to comply with chemical treatment A. Colors: Provide colors as indicated. If no color indicated, provide white. manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 3.1 TESTING A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, A. Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. Accessories: Verify that replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. accessory items required have been furnished and installed. Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Builtpin Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect equipment after installation from damage during construction. If damage occurs despite such protection, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. Delta Issue Nr. Description Date 1AI NTE R I OR. ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check:SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECo.0193.000���° kale °�1"�,=�L'-0"' Cq IJ auk- ;s 0a,i5 E Bfyd 3:, p., F-,., ^ • a %wif2 5 2011 � A p RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 ci d✓ o, Iu -.v-gilt), t E1 ISI S�...s •i'u. S U9�-D� ��„�..-....�,._ Title: S C F �.'� .. S PERMIT CENTER Sheet:AN-Z. 10 ABBREVIATIONS & AND L ANGLE @ AT CL CENTERLINE DIA. DIAMETER PERP. PERPENDICULAR C CHANNEL # POUND OR NUMBER ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE A.D. AREA DRAIN ADJ. ADJUSTABLE A.F.F. ABOVE FINISH FLOOR AGGR. AGGREGATE AL. ALUMINIUM APROX. APPROXIMATE ARCH. ARCHITECTUTRAL ASB. ASBESTOS ASPH. ASPHALT BC BACK OF CURB BD. BOARD BITUM. BITUMINOUS BLDG. BUILDING BLK. BLOCK BLKG. BLOCKING BM. BEAM B.O. BOTTOM OF BOT. BOTTOM B.R. BULLET RESISTANT B.T.B. BACK TO BACK CAB. CABINET C.B. CATCH BASIN CEM. CEMENT CER. CERAMIC C.I. CAST IRON C.J. CONSTRUCTION JOINT CL CENTER LINE CLG. CEILING CLO. CLOSET CLR. CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL. COLUMN CONC. CONCRETE CONSTR. CONSTRUCTION CONT. CONTINUOUS CORR. CORRIDOR CTSK. CONTERSUNK CNTR. COUNTER CT CERAMIC TILE CTR. CENTER DBL. DOUBLE DEOT. DEPARTMENT D.F. DRINKING FOUNTAIN DET. DETAIL DIA. DIAMETER DIM. DIMENSION DISP. DISPENSER DN. DOWN D.O. DOOR OPENING DR. DOOR DWR. DRAWER DS. DOWNSPOUT D.S.P. DRY STANDPIPE DWG. DRAWINGS E EXISTING (E) EXISTING EA. EACH E.J. EXPANSION JOINT EL.. ELEVATION ELEC. ELECTRICAL ELVTR. ELEVATOR EMER. EMERGENCY ENCL. ENCLOSURE E.P. ELECTRICAL PANEL E.P. EDGE OF PAVEMENT EQ. EQUAL EQPT. EQUIPMENT E.W.C. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXIST. EXISTING EXPO. EXPOSED EXP. EXPANSION EXT. EXTERIOR F.A. FIRE ALARM F.B. FLAT BAR F.C. FACE OF CURB F.D. FLOOR DRAIN FDN. FOUNDATION F.A. FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.A.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.F. FINISHED FLOOR F.G. FINISHED GRADE F.H. FIRE HYDRANT F.H.C. FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN. FINISH FL. FLOOR FLASH. FLASHING FLUOR. FLUORESCENT F.O. FACE OF F.O.C. FACE OF CONCRETE F.O.F. FACE OF FINISH F.O.S. FACE OF STUDS F.P.R. FIRE PROTECTION RISER FPRF. FIRE RETARDANT TREATED F.S. FULL SIZE FT. FOOT OR FEET F.TR FIRE TREATED FTG. FOOTING FURR. FURRING F&I FURNISH AND INSTALL FUT. FUTURE GA. GAUGE GALV. GALVANIZED G.B. GRAB BAR G.C. GENERAL CONCTRACTOR GL. GLASS / GLAZING GND. GROUND GR. GRADE GYP. GYPSUM GWB. GYPSUM WALLBOARD H.B. HOSE BIB H.C. CL -<' N N HDWE. HARDWARE HDWR. HARDWARE H.M. HOLLOW METAL HORIZ. HORIZONTAL HR. HOUR HT. HEIGHT ABBREVIATIONS & AND L ANGLE @ AT CL CENTERLINE DIA. DIAMETER PERP. PERPENDICULAR C CHANNEL # POUND OR NUMBER ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE A.D. AREA DRAIN ADJ. ADJUSTABLE A.F.F. ABOVE FINISH FLOOR AGGR. AGGREGATE AL. ALUMINIUM APROX. APPROXIMATE ARCH. ARCHITECTUTRAL ASB. ASBESTOS ASPH. ASPHALT BC BACK OF CURB BD. BOARD BITUM. BITUMINOUS BLDG. BUILDING BLK. BLOCK BLKG. BLOCKING BM. BEAM B.O. BOTTOM OF BOT. BOTTOM B.R. BULLET RESISTANT B.T.B. BACK TO BACK CAB. CABINET C.B. CATCH BASIN CEM. CEMENT CER. CERAMIC C.I. CAST IRON C.J. CONSTRUCTION JOINT CL CENTER LINE CLG. CEILING CLO. CLOSET CLR. CLEAR CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL. COLUMN CONC. CONCRETE CONSTR. CONSTRUCTION CONT. CONTINUOUS CORR. CORRIDOR CTSK. CONTERSUNK CNTR. COUNTER CT CERAMIC TILE CTR. CENTER DBL. DOUBLE DEOT. DEPARTMENT D.F. DRINKING FOUNTAIN DET. DETAIL DIA. DIAMETER DIM. DIMENSION DISP. DISPENSER DN. DOWN D.O. DOOR OPENING DR. DOOR DWR. DRAWER DS. DOWNSPOUT D.S.P. DRY STANDPIPE DWG. DRAWINGS E EXISTING (E) EXISTING EA. EACH E.J. EXPANSION JOINT EL.. ELEVATION ELEC. ELECTRICAL ELVTR. ELEVATOR EMER. EMERGENCY ENCL. ENCLOSURE E.P. ELECTRICAL PANEL E.P. EDGE OF PAVEMENT EQ. EQUAL EQPT. EQUIPMENT E.W.C. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXIST. EXISTING EXPO. EXPOSED EXP. EXPANSION EXT. EXTERIOR F.A. FIRE ALARM F.B. FLAT BAR F.C. FACE OF CURB F.D. FLOOR DRAIN FDN. FOUNDATION F.A. FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.A.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.F. FINISHED FLOOR F.G. FINISHED GRADE F.H. FIRE HYDRANT F.H.C. FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN. FINISH FL. FLOOR FLASH. FLASHING FLUOR. FLUORESCENT F.O. FACE OF F.O.C. FACE OF CONCRETE F.O.F. FACE OF FINISH F.O.S. FACE OF STUDS F.P.R. FIRE PROTECTION RISER FPRF. FIRE RETARDANT TREATED F.S. FULL SIZE FT. FOOT OR FEET F.TR FIRE TREATED FTG. FOOTING FURR. FURRING F&I FURNISH AND INSTALL FUT. FUTURE GA. GAUGE GALV. GALVANIZED G.B. GRAB BAR G.C. GENERAL CONCTRACTOR GL. GLASS / GLAZING GND. GROUND GR. GRADE GYP. GYPSUM GWB. GYPSUM WALLBOARD H.B. HOSE BIB H.C. HOLLOW CAB HDWD. HARDWOOD HDWE. HARDWARE HDWR. HARDWARE H.M. HOLLOW METAL HORIZ. HORIZONTAL HR. HOUR HT. HEIGHT HGT. HEIGHT I.D. INSIDE DEAMETER (DIM.) INSUL. INSULATION INT. INTERIOR JAN. JANITOR JT. JOINT KIT. KITCHEN LAB. LABORATORY LAM. LAMINATE LAV. LAVATORY LKR. LOCKER LT. LIGHT MAX. MAXIMUM M.C. MEDICINE CABINET MECH. MECHANICAL MEMS. MEMBRANE MTL. METAL MFR. MANUFACTURER MH. MANHOLE MIN. MINIMUM MIR. MIRROR MISC. MISCELLANEOUS M.O. MASONRY OPENING MTD. MOUNTED MUL. MULLION (N) NEW N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT NO. OR # NUMBER NR. NUMBER NOM. NOMINAL N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE O.A. OVERALL OBS. OBSCURE O.C. ON CENTER O.D. OUTSIDE DIAMETER (DIM.) OFF. OFFICE OPNG. OPENING OPP. OPPOSITE P. PAINT P.A. PLANTING AREA PRCST. PRECAST PL. PLATE P.LAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLAS. PLASTER PLWD. PLYWOOD PR. PAIR PT. POINT P.T.D. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER P.T.D/R COMBINATION PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND RECEPTACLE Q.T. QUARRY TILE R RISER OR RELOCATE RAD. RADIUS R.D. ROOF DRAIN REF. REFERENCE REFR. REFRIGERATOR RGTR. REGISTER REINF. REINFORCED REQ'D. REQUIRED RESIL. RESILIENT RM. ROOM R.O. ROUGH OPENING RWD. REDWOOD R.W.L. RAIN WATER LEADER S. SOUTH S.A.F.B. SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS S.C. SOLID CORE S.C.D. SEAT COVER DISPENSER SCHED. SCHEDULE S.D. SOAP DISPENSER SECT. SECTION SH. SHELF SHR. SHOWER SHT. SHEET SIM. SIMILAR S.N.D. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER S.N.R. SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLE SNT. SEALANT S.O.B. SYMBOL ON BACKGROUND SPEC. SPECIFICATION SQ. SQUARE S.S. STAINLESS STEEL S.SK. SERVICE SINK STA. STATION STD. STANDARD STL. STEEL STOR. STORAGE STRL. STRUCTURAL SUSP. SUSPENDED SYM. SYMMETRICAL T. TREAD T.B. TOWEL BAR T.B.D. TOBE DETERMINED T.C. TOP OF CONCRETE TEL. TELEPHONE TER. TERRAllO T.&G. TOUNGUE AND GROOVE THK. THICK T.O.C. TOP OF CURB T.O.P. TOP OF PAVEMENT T.P.D. TOILET PAPER DISPENSER T.V. TELEVISION T.W. TOP OF WALL TYP. TYPICAL UNF. UNFINISHED U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UR. URINAL V.C.T. VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERT. VERTICAL VEST. VESTIBULE V.I.F. VERIFY IN FIELD W. WEST W/ WITH W.C. WATER CLOSET WD. WOOD W/O WITHOUT WP. WATERPROOF WSCT. WAINSCOT WT. WEIGHT CONTRACT DOCUMENT NOTES 1. REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 20. EXISTING TENANTS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY STUDY AND COMPARE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITH EACH OTHER AND WITH AS -BUILT DRAWINGS COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH BUILDING OWNER SO AS NOT TO DISTURB OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO ANY TENANT IN THE BUILDING. AVOID CONFLICT PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND SHALL AT ONCE REPORT TO THE ARCHITECT ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES, OR OMISSIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL AND INTERFERENCE WITH NORMAL BUILDING OPERATIONS BY COMPLYING WITH THE BUILDING'S REGULATIONS REGARDING SCHEDULING AND TAKE FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPERVISE AND DIRECT THE WORK. THE CONTRACTOR IS USE OF ELEVATORS AND LOADING DOCKS FOR DELIVERIES, HANDLING OF MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEBRIS. SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR AND HAS CONTROL OVER CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, AND PROCEDURES, AND FOR • 2012 COORDINATING ALL PORTIONS OF THE WORK. 21. COORDINATION 2. VERIFY IN THE FIELD THAT NO CONFLICTS EXIST WHICH WOULD PROHIBIT THE LOCATION OF ANY AND ALL MECHANICAL, TELEPHONE, ELECTRICAL, 2. INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS LIGHTING, PLUMBING, AND SPRINKLER EQUIPMENT (TO INCLUDE ALL REQUIRED PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND CONDUIT), AND THAT ALL REQUIRED THE INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IS TO ALLOW FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. EVERY ITEM NECESSARILY REQUIRED MAY NOT CLEARANCES FOR INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OF ABOVE EQUIPMENT ARE PROVIDED. BE SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED OR SHOWN. UNLESS EXPRESSLY STATED, ALL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COMPLETED AND PROJECT SITE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ASBESTOS, ASBESTOS PRODUCTS, PCB MOLD, OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCES. APPROPRIATELY OPERABLE. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL SPECIFIED AND APPROPRIATE ITEMS, AND ALL INCIDENTAL, ACCESSORY, AND OTHER 22. PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK ITEMS NOT SPECIFIED BUT REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND FINISHED ASSEMBLY. PROVIDE PROTECTION TO ALL EXISTING FINISHES IN ALL SPACES WITHIN OR ADJACENT TO THE SCOPE OF WORK AND THE TENANTS SPACE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PATCH, REFINISH, AND REPAIR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY HIM OR HIS SUBCONTRACTORS. MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT 3. DEFECTIVE WORK FINISH, OR AS NOTED HEREIN. NON-COMPLIANT DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP OR QUALITY WILL BE REJECTED DESPITE THE ARCHITECTS FAILURE TO DISCOVER OR POINT OUT DEFECTS OR DEFICIENCIES DURING CONSTRUCTION. DEFECTIVE WORK REVEALED WITHIN THE TIME REQUIRED BY GUARANTEES SHALL BE 23. EXISTING DEFECTS REPLACED BY WORK CONFORMING TO THE INTENT OF THE CONTRACT. NO PAYMENT, EITHER PARTIAL OR FINAL, SHALL BE CONSTRUED AS AN CORRECT ANY DEFECTS FOUND IN EXISTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION WHICH AFFECTS THE SCOPE OF WORK. THIS INCLUDES BUT IS NOT ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK OR IMPROPER MATERIALS. LIMITED TO UNEVEN SURFACES AND FINISHES AT GYPSUM BOARD UL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES OR DAMAGED FIREPROOFING. PATCH AND REPAIR SURFACES TO MATCH ADJACENT, ADJOINING SURFACES MATERIALS AND FINISHES. 4. FIREPROOFING 5. PATCH AND REPAIR ALL SPRAY FIREPROOFING DAMAGE INCURRED DURING DEMOLITION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION. FIRESAFE AS REQUIRED PER 24. TERMINOLOGY APPLICABLE CODE ALL NEW PENETRATIONS AT EXISTING AND NEW UL RATED ASSEMBLIES. "TYPICAL" OR "TYP." MEANS IDENTICAL FOR ALL SIMILAR CONDITIONS, U.O.N. "SIMILAR" OR "SIM." MEANS COMPARABLE CHARACTERISTICS TO THE CONDITION NOTED. VERIFY DIMENSIONS AND ORIENTATION ON PLAN. 5. AS BUILT DRAWINGS "VERIFY" OR "VER." MEANS TO ASCERTAIN AND CONFIRM APPLICATION WITH ARCHITECT. CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE AS -BUILT DRAWINGS BASED ON THE ARCHITECTS RECORD DRAWINGS AND DISTRIBUTE ELECTRONICALLY TO THE • ANY QUESTIONS THAT ARISE RELATED TO ASBESTOS SHALL BE REFERRED TO THE OWNER FOR RESOLUTION. INTERIOR ARCHITECTS OWNER AT THE CONCLUSION OF THE PROJECT. 25. FURNITURE FURNITURE SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS, U.O.N. FINAL DIMENSIONS LOCATIONS AND ASSEMBLIES ARE THE 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FURNITURE VENDOR. IT IS INTENDED THAT THE CONTRACTOR PROVIDE A COMPLETE JOB IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE DESIGN INTENT AND ANY OMISSIONS IN THESE • YYYY NOTES OR IN THE OUTLINE OF WORK SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS RELIEVING THE CONTRACTOR OF SUCH RESPONSIBILITIES IMPLIED BY SCOPE 26. FILE CABINETS OF WORK EXCEPT FOR ITEMS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OR DETAILED. FILE CABINETS, AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, ARE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE FILE SIZE(S) WITH FURNITURE INSTALLER FOR REQUIRED CLEARANCES. 7. UNENFORCEABLE WORK SHOULD ANY PORTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROVE TO BE, FOR WHATEVER REASONS, UNENFORCEABLE, SUCH UNENFORCEABILITY 27. CLEANING SHALL NOT EXTEND TO THE REMAINDER OF THE CONTRACT NOR SHALL IT VOID ANY OTHER PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT. PROVIDE STRICT CONTROL OF JOB CLEANING AND PREVENT DUST AND DEBRIS FROM MIGRATING FROM CONSTRUCTION AREA. 8. LIENS 28. ADJACENT SPACES THROUGHOUT THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFRAIN FROM ACTIONS THAT COULD LEAD TO THE FILING OF CLAIMS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING OF ACCESS INTO ADJACENT TENANT SPACES INCLUDING CONCEALED CONDITIONS, OF LIEN BY SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS OF MATERIALS, LABOR, SERVICE, EQUIPMENT, OR ANY OTHER INDIVIDUAL OR COMPANY SO ENTITLED WITH THE BUILDING MANAGEMENT AS REQUIRED FOR PRICING AND EXECUTION OF THE WORK. UNDER GOVERNING LAWS AND REGULATIONS, UNLESS REASONABLE AND JUSTIFIABLE CAUSE CAN BE SHOWN. APPROVAL FOR PAYMENT SHALL BE CONTINGENT UPON THE CONTRACTOR'S OBTAINING AND FURNISHING TO THE ARCHITECT SIGNED RELEASES FROM SUCH INDIVIDUALS OR 29. EXISTING CONDITIONS COMPANIES. CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY EXAMINE THE PREMISES AND SHALL BASE HIS BID ON THE EXISTING CONDITIONS, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY INFORMATION SHOWN OR NOT INDICATED ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. WHERE FIELD CONDITIONS WARRANT, PROVIDE AND IDENTIFY LUMP 9. COORDINATION OF THE WORK SUM ALLOWANCE FOR WORK REQUIRED BUT NOT CLEAR BASED ON THE INFORMATION AVAILABLE PRIOR TO BID. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REVIEW AND VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, FIELD CONDITIONS, AND DIMENSIONS FOR ACCURACY AND CONFIRMING THAT WORK IS BUILDABLE AS SHOWN BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH CONSTRUCTION. IF THERE ARE ANY QUESTIONS 30. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS REGARDING THESE OR OTHER COORDINATION ISSUES, INCLUDING CONCEALED CONDITIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT THEM IN WRITING ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE COMPLEMENTARY AND WHAT IS CALLED FOR BY ANY WILL BE AS BINDING AS IF CALLED FOR BY ALL. ALL WORK TO THE ARCHITECT AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A WRITTEN CLARIFICATION FROM THE ARCHITECT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK IN SHOWN OR REFERRED TO ON ANY CONTRACT DOCUMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED AS THOUGH THEY ARE ON ALL RELATED DOCUMENTS. QUESTION, OR RELATED WORK. 31. DUPLICATION OF DOCUMENTS 10. WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT/OWNER AND THE SAME EXECUTE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL CODES, MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT/OWNER. AND TRADE AND REFERENCED STANDARDS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: IBC, NEC AND NFPA (LATEST APPLICABLE ENFORCED EDITIONS REFERENCED). 32. DETAIL REFERENCE REFER TO A-8 SHEETS SERIES FOR DETAILS NOT CROSS REFERENCED FOR ALL THE CONDITIONS OF PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE RATED 11. DIMENSIONS ASSEMBLIES AND ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS; DIMENSIONS SHALL GOVERN. DETAILS SHALL GOVERN OVER PLANS AND ELEVATIONS. LARGE SCALE DETAILS SHALL GOVERN OVER SMALL SCALE DETAILS. WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS SHALL GOVERN OVER ALL. 33. EXISTING PENETRATIONS AT UL FIRE RATED AND ACOUSTICAL LOCATIONS, MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF EXISTING ASSEMBLY WHEN IMPACTED BY NEW WORK. 12. CLARIFICATIONS CLARIFY ALL DISCREPANCIES RELATIVE TO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BIDS 34. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS AND COMMENCING WORK. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW ALL SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROPRIATENESS AND COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SENDING SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER FOR REVIEW. A STAMP OR 13. SUBSTITUTIONS STATEMENT TESTIFYING THE CONTRACTOR HAS REVIEWED THE SHOP DRAWINGS, INCLUDING THE DATE REVIEWED, MUST BE AFFIXED TO THE FIRST THERE SHALL BE NO SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS WHERE A MANUFACTURER IS SPECIFIED. WHERE THE TERM "OR EQUAL" IS USED, THE PAGE OF EACH SUBMITTAL. ARCHITECT ALONE SHALL DETERMINE EQUALITY BASED UPON INFORMATION SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR, INCLUDING THE ARCHITECTS SUBSTITUTION FORM CLEARLY IDENTIFIED AS A "REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION". CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO LIST CREDIT TO THE CLIENT FOR USE OF 35. DEFECTIVE WORK - AT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN SUBSTITUTION. CORRECT ANY DEFECTS FOUND IN CONSTRUCTION RELATING TO INTERIOR FINISHES IN AREAS AFFECTED BY THIS SCOPE OF WORK. THIS INCLUDES BUT NOT LIMITED TO WALL BASE - CEILING GRID AND ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE - DOORS/FRAMES/HARDWARE - FLOORING SUBSTRATES - 14. DRAWING DISTRIBUTION GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT SITE CONDITIONS PRIOR TO COMPLETING BID DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISTRIBUTION OF DRAWINGS TO ALL TRADES UNDER THEIR JURISDICTION. 36. CONTRACT DOCUMENT COORDINATION 15. CHANGES IN THE WORK THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY STUDY AND COMPARE ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITH EACH OTHER FOR ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DO NOT PROCEED WITH ANY WORK REQUIRING ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION BEYOND THE CONTRACT AMOUNT WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING, OF ANY DISCREPANCIES FOR APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER. FAILURE TO OBTAIN AUTHORIZATION SHALL INVALIDATE ANY CLAIM FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION IN THAT AREA 16. EXISTING WORK 37. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ALL INSTALLED PLUMBING, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL OPERATE QUIETLY AND FREE OF VIBRATION. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS HEREIN - EITHER APPARENT OR OBVIOUS - PRIOR TO THE START OF NEW WORK ON THAT ITEM, OR BEAR THE RESPONSIBILITY OF CORRECTING SUCH WORK AS DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT. 17. PUNCH LIST THE WORK TO BE DONE UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE EXECUTED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER, TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT. IF UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF SUCH COMPLETION. THESE DOCUMENTS OR JOB CONDITIONS MAKE IT IMPOSSIBLE TO PRODUCE FIRST CLASS WORK OR TO WARRANTY THE WORK OR ITS THE ARCHITECT SHALL ATTEND THE PUNCH LIST WALK THROUGH CONDUCTED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE, OR SHOULD DISCREPANCIES APPEAR AMONG THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, REQUEST INTERPRETATION, CORRECTION OR SHALL PREPARE AND DISTRIBUTE A LIST OF ITEMS TO BE FINISHED OR COMPLETED PRIOR TO THIS WALK THROUGH. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR CLARIFICATION FROM THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. IF THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO MAKE SUCH REQUEST, WORK MUST SHALL TAKE NOTES AND PREPARE A LIST OF FINAL PUNCH ITEMS TO BE COMPLETED OR CORRECTED AS A RESULT OF THIS WALK THROUGH. THIS BE PERFORMED IN A SATISFACTORY MANNER AND NO REQUEST FOR ADDED COST OR EXTENSION OF TIME WILL BE CONSIDERED. SHOULD PUNCH LIST IS TO BE PROMPTLY DISTRIBUTED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO THE TENANT, OWNER AND ARCHITECT. CONFLICT OCCUR IN OR BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, CONTRACTOR IS DEEMED TO HAVE ESTIMATED ON THE MORE EXPENSIVE WAY OF DOING WORK UNLESS HE SHALL HAVE ASKED FOR AND OBTAINED WRITTEN DECISION BEFORE SUBMISSION OF BID AS TO WHICH METHOD OR 18. MATERIALS MATERIALS WILL BE REQUIRED. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW, UNUSED, AND OF THE HIGHEST QUALITY IN EVERY RESPECT, U.O.N. MANUFACTURED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS, U.O.N. 19. INSURANCE THE CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PURCHASE AND MAINTAIN CERTIFICATIONS OF INSURANCE WITH RESPECT TO WORKERS COMPENSATION, PUBLIC LIABILITY, AND PROPERTY DAMAGE FOR THE LIMITS AS REQUIRED BY LAW, IN ADDITION TO THE TERMS OF THE OWNER'S CONTRACT, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INITIATING, MAINTAINING, AND SUPERVISING ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK. KEY PLAN- LEVEL 1 KEY PLAN- LEVEL 2 TRUE NORTH TRUE NORTH SITE LOCATION rnU%j1zk.J# 1 01 1 I= WEEKLY STATUS REPORTS 1. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS NOTES IOR ARCHITECTS CODE REFERENCES THE GC IS TO PROVIDE A WEEKLY STATUS REPORT INDICATING ESTIMATED PERCENTAGE OF COMPLETION FOR EACH TRADE INCLUSIVE OF • OWNER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT INTERIOR ARCHITECTS SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE DISCOVERY, REMOVAL, PRESENCE • 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH WASHINGTON STATE AMENDMENTS DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHS AS SUPPORTING INFORMATION. REPORT AND IMAGES ARE TO BE SENT ELECTRONICALLY TO THE IA PROJECT 2. HANDLING, DISPOSAL OF, OR EXPOSURE OF PERSONS TO HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES, MATERIALS, AND WASTES IN ANY FORM AT THE 3. ALL WOOD AND WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. CONTACT OF THE SALIENT AREAS &/OR WORK. THE NUMBER AND LOCATIONS OF PHOTOS TO BE PRE -DETERMINED BY THE IA PROJECT 4. PROJECT SITE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ASBESTOS, ASBESTOS PRODUCTS, PCB MOLD, OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCES. • YYYY ELECTRICAL CODE CONTACT. WALL AND CEILINGS: PER ASTM E84, CLASS A FLAME SPREAD: 0-25 • THE OWNER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ACCEPTS RESPONSIBILITY FOR NOTIFYING THE APPROPRIATE FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL • YYYY MECHANICAL CODE GOVERNING AGENCIES FOR ANY DEMOLITION, CONSTRUCTION, OR REPAIR WORK. 5. ALL DOORS TO BE 36" WIDE MIN., 34" MIN. CLR. IN OPEN POSITION (U.O.N.). DEFERRED SUBMITTALS MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING OR SEPARATE PERMIT: • YYYY PLUMBING CODE • ANY QUESTIONS THAT ARISE RELATED TO ASBESTOS SHALL BE REFERRED TO THE OWNER FOR RESOLUTION. INTERIOR ARCHITECTS SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO DO ANY WORK NOR RENDER ANY OPINIONS RELATED TO ASBESTOS. • YYYY INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE • THE OWNER SHALL RETAIN AN INDEPENDENT CONSULTANT WHO IS TRAINED AND EXPERIENCED IN IDENTIFICATION AND SURVEY OF • YYYY ACCESSIBILITY CODE EXISTING SITES PRIOR TO START OF DEMOLITION CONSTRUCTION. • ALL CITY LOCAL CODES AND AMENDMENTS • ALL CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL REPORT THE PRESENCE OF ANY MATERIAL OR ASSEMBLY SUSPECTED TO CONTAIN ASBESTOS UPON DISCOVERY. THE WORK SHALL BE CARRIED OUT PER THE CONSULTANTS' RECOMMENDATIONS. PROJECT MAN UAL IA'S PROJECT MANUAL DATED TITLED ARE HEREBY MADE A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT ADDRESS: BUILDING 7 645 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WA 98188 PROJECT DESCRIPTION: DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION OF INTERIOR PARTITIONS, SUSPENDED CEILING (EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AND REPAIR) AND INTERIOR FINISHES, ALTERATIONS TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND VOICE/DATA CABLING SYSTEMS ARE TO BE FILED UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT. THE SCOP OF WORK DOES NOT INCLUDE ALTERATIONS TO THE EXISTING BUILDING ENVELOPMENT. TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: TYPE 1 -FR - FULLY SPRINKLER BUILDING OCCUPANCY: B - OFFICE PROJECT AREA: 0 SF BUILDING NO. OF STORIES: 2 AREA PER FLOOR: BUILDING LIFE SAFETY INFO: I SPRINKLERS, VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARMS PROVIDED ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE ALL MISSING FIREPROOFING AND FIRESTOPPING. IOR ARCHITECTS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE ALL FIREPROOFING AFFECTED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION WITH FIREPROOFING TO MATCH BASE BUILDING STANDARDS, APPROVED EQUAL, OR AS REQUIRED TO MATCH THE EXISTING. 2. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE NON-COMBUSTIBLE. 3. ALL WOOD AND WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. 4. ALL INTERIOR FINISHES SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REFERENCED CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR FLAMMABILITY AND SMOKE DEVELOPED RATINGS AS WELL AS TOXICITY. WALL AND CEILINGS: PER ASTM E84, CLASS A FLAME SPREAD: 0-25 SMOKE DEVELOPMENT: 0-200 FLOORING: ASTM E648, CLASS I CRITICAL RADIANT FLUX OF NOT LESS THAN 0.45 WATTS PER SQUARE CENTIMETER 5. ALL DOORS TO BE 36" WIDE MIN., 34" MIN. CLR. IN OPEN POSITION (U.O.N.). DEFERRED SUBMITTALS MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING OR SEPARATE PERMIT: SITE KEY PLAN BUILDING 5 -IVSD CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER ,►, 'Coal mv. 645 WEST 71UNKWILA, WA 98188 9400 [ REGISTERED MILLER HNGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INT E R IOR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 1 N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WR=N MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: sE'-.' I," EJB -s CODE M`..J -)L1g NCEE 'if=.P� 12'5 201.3 PmKft0JECT m m Title:F® AT' :_N 37`"g;zy;, il ,Sheet:AN=1 i oN DEMOLITION NOTES 1. SUMMARY WORK NECESSARY FOR COMPLETE DEMOLITION INCLUDES FURNISHING LABOR FOR DEMOLITION, REMOVAL OF DEBRIS, PATCHING AS REQUIRED, CONTROL DUST, AND NECESSARY PERMITS. 2. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS IF ASBESTOS OR OTHER HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ARE DISCOVERED DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER IN WRITING, THEN WAIT FOR DIRECTION FROM THE OWNER. OTHER MATERIALS AND WASTE IN ANY FORM AT THE PROJECT SITE MAY BE LOCATED ON THE PROJECT SITE, WHICH MAY INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO ACBM, PCB'S OR OTHER TOXIC SUBSTANCES. 3. SCHEDULE SUBMIT SCHEDULE INDICATING PROPOSED SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK TO ARCHITECT AND THEIR CONSULTANTS, AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE CITY BUILDING OFFICIALS, AND BUILDING MANAGEMENT FOR REVIEW. INCLUDE COORDINATION FOR SHUT OFF, CAPPING, AND CONTINUATION OF UTILITY SERVICES AS REQUIRED TOGETHER WITH DETAILS FOR DUST AND NOISE CONTROL. PROVIDE DETAILED SEQUENCE OF DEMOLITION, FLOOR BY FLOOR, AND REMOVAL WORK TO ENSURE UNINTERRUPTED PROGRESS OF OWNER'S ON-SITE OPERATIONS, AND BUILDING OPERATIONS. 4. CONDITION OF STRUCTURES OWNER ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACTUAL CONDITION OF ITEMS OR STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED. CONDITIONS EXISTING AT THE TIME OF COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT WILL BE MAINTAINED BY OWNER INSOFAR AS PRACTICAL. VARIATIONS WITHIN STRUCTURE MAY OCCUR BY OWNER'S REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OPERATIONS PRIOR TO START OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK. 5. PARTIAL DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL STORAGE OF REMOVED ITEMS WILL BE PERMITTED AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER. 6. PROTECTIONS PROVIDE PROTECTIVE BARRICADES, PROTECTIVE CANOPIES, AND OTHER FORMS OF PROTECTION AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT OWNER'S PERSONNEL AND GENERAL PUBLIC FROM INJURY DUE TO SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE MEASURES AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE FREE AND SAFE PASSAGE OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL, TENANT, THEIR EMPLOYEES AND THEIR INVITEES, AND GENERAL PUBLIC TO AND FROM OCCUPIED PORTIONS OF BUILDING. PROTECT FROM DAMAGE EXISTING FINISH WORK THAT IS TO REMAIN IN PLACE AND BECOMES EXPOSED DURING DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. PROTECT FLOORS WITH SUITABLE COVERINGS WHEN NECESSARY. CONSTRUCT TEMPORARY INSULATED SOLID DUST PROOF PARTITIONS WHERE REQUIRED TO SEPARATE AREAS WHERE NOISY OR EXTENSIVE DIRT OR DUST OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED. EQUIP PARTITIONS WITH DUST PROOF DOORS AND SECURITY LOCKS IF REQUIRED. PROVIDE TEMPORARY WEATHER PROTECTION WHEN APPLICABALE DURING INTERVAL BETWEEN DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ON EXTERIOR SURFACES AND INSTALLATION OF NEW CONSTRUCTION TO ENSURE THAT NO WATER LEAKAGE OR DAMAGE OCCURS TO STRUCTURE OR INTERIOR AREAS OF EXISTING BUILDING. REMOVE PROTECTIONS AT COMPLETION OF WORK. 7. DAMAGES PROMPTLY REPAIR DAMAGES CAUSED TO ADJACENT FACILITIES BY DEMOLITION WORK AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. 8. TRAFFIC CONDUCT SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS AND DEBRIS REMOVAL IN A MANNER TO ENSURE MINIMUM INTERFERENCE WITH ROADS, STREETS, WALKS, AND OTHER ADJACENT OCCUPIED OR USED FACILITIES. 9. UTILITY SERVICES MAINTAIN EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM AND UTILITIES TO REMAIN, KEEP IN SERVICE, IDENTITY, AND PROTECT AGAINST DAMAGE DURING DEMOLITION OPERATIONS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER AS REQUIRED. SEE DRAWINGS FOR EXISTING STANDPIPE LOCATIONS. REMOVAL OF ANY EQUIPMENT, CABLING SWITCHES, AND CONDUIT PERTAINING TO DATA/COMMUNICATIONS AND TELEPHONE SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH TELEPHONE COMPANIES SERVICE OWNER OR TENANT DATAICOMMUNICATIONS REPRESENTATIVE AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT NEW CONSTRUCTION DELAYS. REMOVE TO SOURCE ALL PIPES, VENTS, APPLIANCES, OR DRAINS NOT BEING RE -USED. 10. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS USE TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND OTHER SUITABLE METHODS TO ISOLATE DUST AND DIRT RISING AND SCATTERING. COMPLY WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT REGULATIONS AND GOVERNING REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION. 11. INSPECTION PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION WORK, INSPECT AREAS IN WHICH WORK WILL BE PERFORMED IF NECESSARY. PHOTOGRAPH EXISTING CONDITIONS TO STRUCTURE SURFACES, EQUIPMENT, OR TO SURROUNDING PROPERTIES WHICH COULD BE MISCONSTRUCTED AS DAMAGE RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION WORK. FILE WITH OWNER PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 12. PREPARATION CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SHORING, BRACING, OR SUPPORT TO PREVENT MOVEMENT, SETTLEMENT, OR COLLAPSE OF STRUCTURES TO BE DEMOLISHED AND ADJACENT FACILITIES TO REMAIN. WORK SHALL BE DONE UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF A LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT THE PROJECT SITE. CONTRACTOR SHALL CEASE OPERATIONS AT HIS/HER DISCRETION AND NOTIFY OWNER AND BUILDING MANAGEMENT IMMEDIATELY IF SAFETY OF STRUCTURE APPEARS TO BE ENDANGERED. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS AS DIRECTED BY THE CONTRACTORS LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO SAFELY SUPPORT THE STRUCTURE UNTIL A DETERMINATION IS MADE FOR CONTINUING THE WORK AS DIRECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR'S LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO SUPPORT STRUCTURE UNTIL DETERMINATION IS MADE FOR CONTINUING OPERATIONS. CONTRACTOR IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION MEANS AND METHODS. 13. COVER AND PROTECT COVER AND PROTECT FURNITURE, EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES, AND OTHER ITEMS TO REMAIN FROM SOILING OR DAMAGE WHEN DEMOLITION WORK IS PERFORMED IN ROOMS OR AREAS FROM WHICH SUCH ITEMS HAVE BEEN REMOVED. 14. CLEANUP AT COMPLETION OF DEMOLITION WORK, THE CONSTRUCTION AREAS SHALL BE LEFT IN BROOMED AND CLEAN CONDITION. CARPETED AREAS TO BE LEFT IN A VACUUM CLEAN CONDITION. VINYL FLOORING SHALL BE DAMP MOPPED AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. ALL DEBRIS AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL SHALL BE REMOVED AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. 15. FREIGH I ELEVATOR DEBRIS REMOVAL MUST BE PERFORMED USING THE FREIGHT ELEVATOR. CONTACT THE BUILDING MANAGEMENT OFFICE TO OBTAIN SCHEDULE FOR THE USE OF THE FREIGHT ELEVATOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID. ALL DEBRIS REMOVAL SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES. 16. EXISTING ELECTRICAL IN PARTITIONS TO BE REMOVED, REMOVE AND CAP ALL OUTLETS, SWITCHES, WIRES, THERMOSTATS, ETC. TO THEIR SOURCE AS REQUIRED. ALL EXISTING FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLETS, WHERE NOTED TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED, SHALL BE CAPPED OFF TO THE NEAREST JUNCTION BOX. FILL AND LEVEL FLOOR TO ACCEPT NEW FLOOR COVERING. REMOVAL OF ANY EQUIPMENT, CABLING SWITCHES, AND CONDUIT PERTAINING TO DATA/COMMUNICATIONS AND TELEPHONE SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH TELEPHONE COMPANIES, SERVICE OWNER, OR TENANT DATA/COMMUNICATIONS REPRESENTATIVE AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT NEW CONSTRUCTION DELAYS. 17. PATCHING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING AND/OR REPAIRING ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY HIM OR HIS SUBCONTRACTORS TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN ELEVATOR LOBBY, PUBLIC CORRIDORS, RESTROOMS, OR TENANT SPACES. REFINISH TO MATCH EXISTING ADJACENT FINISH, OR AS NOTED HEREIN. 18. PIPES AND VENTS REMOVE TO SOURCE ALL ANCILLARY PIPES, VENTS, APPLIANCES AND DRAINS SCHEDULED FOR DEMOLITION. WHERE APPLICABLE, CAP AT RISER AND FIRESAFE PER UL EXISTING PENETRATIONS. 19. FLOORING REMOVE ALL EXISTING IRREGULAR MATERIALS WHICH CAUSE RISES AND DEPRESSIONS IN FLOORING SURFACE, SUCH AS FASTENERS, OUTLET CORES, COVER PLATES, RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS, CARPET, CARPET PAD, FLASH PATCH, CONCRETE FILL, PLYWOOD, ETC. 20. WALL COVERING SHOULD PAPER LAYER OF EXISTING GYP BD BE DAMAGED, REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING GYP BD AT SCHEDULED WALL COVERING REMOVAL, LOCATIONS. 21. DEMOLITION DEMOLITION IS NOT NECESSARILY LIMITED TO WHAT IS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. THE INTENT IS TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF DEMOLITION REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE WORK HEREIN. IF QUESTIONS ARISE AS TO THE REMOVAL OF ANY MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, CLARIFY THE POINT IN QUESTION WITH THE ARCHITECT BEFORE PROCEEDING. 22. STAIRWAYS STAIRWAYS MUST REMAIN ACCESSIBLE INCLUDING A CLEAR PATH OF EGRESS AT ALL TIMES DURING DEMOLITION. 23. GRAPHICS REMOVE EXISTING SIGNAGE/GRAPHICS AND STORE FOR RE -USE WHERE APPLICABLE. 24. FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM NO EXISTING SMOKE DETECTOR, PUBLIC ADDRESS SPEAKER, FIRE ALARM BOX, OR SIMILAR DEVICE, INCLUDING THE ASSOCIATED WIRING, SHALL BE DAMAGED DURING DEMOLITION AND SUBSEQUENT CONSTRUCTION. RELOCATION OF SMOKE DETECTORS, PUBLIC ADDRESS SPEAKERS, AND FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT, NECESSITATED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION, SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED AS A FIRST PRIORITY, AND PER THE PLANS. NO ACTIVE SMOKE DETECTOR SHALL BE COVERED OR OTHERWISE REMOVED OR USED FOR OTHER THAN ITS INTENDED PURPOSE. 25. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT: WHERE LOCAL GREEN BUILDING ORDINANCE DOES NOT DICTATE TO THE CONTRARY AND LEED CERTIFICATION IS NOT REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; • REDIRECT CONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION & PACKAGING DEBRIS TO SOURCES OTHER THAN LANDFILL. • STRATEGIES MAY INCLUDE: • REDIRECT PACKAGING DEBRIS BACK TO THE MANUFACTURER. • DONATE SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO A RECLAMATION SITE OR NON-PROFIT CHARITY SUCH AS HABITAT FOR HUMANITY. • DESIGNATE RECYCLING AREAS DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. • IDENTIFY CONSTRUCTION HAULERS & RECYCLERS TO HANDLE THE DESIGNATED MATERIALS AS INTENDED. • CONTACT A REGIONAL CARPET RECLAMATION FACILITY FOR SALVAGE OF CARPETING 25, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT- PROJECTS LOCATED IN SAN FRANCISCO: 100% OF MIXED DEBRIS MUST BE TRANSPORTED BY A REGISTERED HAULER TO A REGISTERED FACILITY AND BE PROCESSED FOR RECYCLING, IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SAN FRANCISCO CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION DEBRIS ORDINANCE; • REDIRECT CONSTRUCTION, DEMOLITION & PACKAGING DEBRIS TO SOURCES OTHER THAN LANDFILL. • STRATEGIES MAY INCLUDE: • REDIRECT PACKAGING DEBRIS BACK TO THE MANUFACTURER. • DONATE SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS TO A RECLAMATION SITE OR NON-PROFIT CHARITY SUCH AS HABITAT FOR HUMANITY. • DESIGNATE RECYCLING AREAS DURING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION. • CONTACT A REGIONAL CARPET RECLAMATION FACILITY FOR SALVAGE OF CARPETING 26. THERMOSTATS IN PARTITIONS TO BE REMOVED, ALL THERMOSTATS CONTROLS TO BE TAGGED FOE RELOCATION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO REQUEST IN WRITING FOR REVISED CONTROL LOCATIONS PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION. 27. PROJECTS LOCATED IN NEW YORK CITY DEMOLITION AND SURPLUS BUILDING MATERIALS SHALL BE SORTED AND RECYCLED IN COMPLIANCE WITH NEW YORK CITY CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS. 2 IL N In 0 2 N PARTITION PLAN NOTES 1. DIMENSIONS DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS, WRITTEN DIMENSIONS GOVERN. ALL PARTITION LOCATIONS SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON PARTITION PLAN. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, NOTIFY ARCHITECT. PARTITION PLAN BY ARCHITECT TAKES PRECEDENCEOVER ALL OTHER PLANS. 2. PARTITIONS ALL GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS SHALL BE TAPED AND SANDED SMOOTH WITH NO VISIBLE JOINTS OR LINES. ALL SCREWS OR OTHER ATTACHMENI DEVICES SHALL BE PATCHED AND NOT VISIBLE. PATCH AND REPAIR SURFACES TO MATCH ADJACENT OR ADJOINING SURFACES WHERE REQUIRED. ALL SURFACES SHALL BE ALIGNED AND SANDED SMOOTH. 3. DIMENSION REFERENCE POINTS ALL PARTITIONS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM FINISH FACE OF GYPSUM BOARD TO FINISH FACE OF GYPSUM BOARD, U.O.N. ALL DIMENSIONS MARKED "CLEAR" OR "CLR" SHALL BE MAINTAINED AND SHALL ALLOW FOR THICKNESS OF ALL WALL FINISHES, U.O.N. ALL DIMENSIONS TO THE EXTERIOR WINDOW WALL ARE TO THE INSIDE FACE OF WINDOW FRAME ASSEMBLY, U.O.N. 4. CLEAR DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS NOTED "CLEAR" OR "CLR" MUST BE ACCURATELY MAINTAINED, AND SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN ±1/8" WITHOUT WRITTEN INSTRUCTION FROM ARCHITECT. 5. DIMENSION TOLERANCES DIMENSIONS TOLERANCES SHALL NOT EXCEED (LOCAL JURISDICTION CODE DEFINED CRITERIA). VERIFY FIELD DIMENSIONS EXCEEDING TOLERANCE WITH THE ARCHITECT AND SECURE ARCHITECTS APPROVAL. 6. DISCREPANCIES NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR CONFLICTS IN THE LOCATION(S) OF NEW CONSTRUCTION. UPON COMPLETION OF PARTITION OF THE LAYOUT, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT. VERIFICATION OF THE LAYOUT TO BE PROVIDED BY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO PARTITION INSTALLATION.FOR BID PRICING, G.C. TO PRICE HIGHER OPTION REQUIRED BY ANY DISCREPANCY NOTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT FOR FINAL SCOPE DECISION FOR THESE ITEMS PRIOR TO PURCHASING. 7. EXPOSED EDGES ALL EXPOSED GYPSUM BOARD EDGES TO HAVE METAL EDGE TRIM. 8. ALIGNMENT ALL WORK SHALL BE ERECTED AND INSTALLED PLUMB, LEVEL, SQUARE AND TRUE, AND IN PROPER ALIGNMENT. "ALIGN" MEANS TO ACCURATELY LOCATE FINISHED FACES IN THE SAME PLANE. 9. MILLWORK REFER TO MILLWORK SHOP DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFIC DETAILS OF COORDINATION BETWEEN DRYWALL/MILLWORK CONDITIONS. 10. CEILING HEIGHT PARTITIONS REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR SOFFITS, CEILING HEIGHTS, AND PLENUM BARRIER LOCATIONS. 11. NOTES AND REFERENCES REFER TO SHEET A-1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES, LEGENDS, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND SCHEDULES. 12. ELECTRICAL WORK REFER TO POWER & SIGNAL AND REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF SWITCHES, OUTLETS, AND THE LIKE TO BE REMOVED. PATCH AND REPAIR PARTITION TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACE AND FINISH. 13. ARCHITECT APPROVAL OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM ARCHITECT PRIOR TO MODIFYING COLUMN FURRING, RELOCATING PIPES, AND SIMILAR SYSTEMS AND ITEMS, ADJUSTING ANY AND ALL OTHER FIELD CONDITIONS REQUIRED TO FIT PLANS. 14. SLAB WORK ALL EXISTING AND NEW UL RATED FLOOR SLAB PENETRATIONS FOR PIPING AND CONDUIT SHALL BE FULLY PACKED AND SEALED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE BUILDING AND FIRE CODES. 15. DOOR CLEARANCES TRIM THE BOTTOMS OF DOORS TO CLEAR THE TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR, AS APPLICABLE, BY 1/4" INCH MAXIMUM, U.O.N. VERIFY SLAB CONDITIONS AND TRIM EACH DOOR TO FIT CONDITIONS. WHERE RADICAL VARIATIONS IN FLOOR ELEVATION EXIST, DOORS SHALL BE ORDERED WITH BOTTOM STILE SIZED TO ACCOMMODATE THESE UNDERCUT CONDITIONS. 16. GLASS WORK ALL GLASS SHALL BE CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS, U.O.N. GLAZING TONG MARKS SHALL NOT BE VISIBLE. CLEAN AND POLISH ALL GLASS PRIOR TO PROJECT DELIVERY. 17. CEILING HEIGHT PARTITIONS CEILING HEIGHT PARTITIONS SHALL BE INSTALLED TIGHT TO FINISHED CEILING; WITH NO JOINTS VARYING MORE THAN 1/8" OVER 6'4" AND NO JOINTS GREATER THAN 3/16", U.O.N. 18. DOOR DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS LOCATING DOORS ARE TO THE INSIDE EDGE OF JAMB, U.O.N. ALL INTERIOR DOORS SHALL HAVE MIN. V-6" CLEAR ON STRIKE/PULL SIDE OF DOOR. VERIFY AND ADVISE ARCHITECT OF EXCEPTIONS PRIOR TO CLOSING OUT PARTITIONS. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE 2-0" CLEAR ON STRIKE/PULL SIDE OF DOOR U.O.N. 19. MILLWORK ALL MILLWORK TO BE FASTENED TO THE PARTITION. PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR ALL MILLWORK NOT SUPPORTED BY SLABS OR ABOVE 4'-0" HEIGHT. ALL CONCEALED LUMBER AND BLOCKING TO BE FIRE TREATED. 20. WHERE NOT STATED IN THE SHEET SPECIFICATIONS AND THERE IS NO PROJECT MANUAL, AT A MINIMUM PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR: MILLWORK DOORS/FRAMES/HARDWARE GLAZING CARPET SEAMING DIAGRAM • FABRIC WRAPPED PANELS • DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 21. PATCH AND REPAIR AT ALL PERIMETER CONDITIONS WHERE DEMO OCCURS SHALL BE PATCHED AND REPAIRED. ALL EXISTING WALLS DAMAGED SHALL BE REPAIRED P REQUIRED TO RECEIVE SCHEDULED FINISH. 22. GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES: WHERE LOCAL GREEN BUILDING ORDINANCE DOES NOT DICTATE TO THE CONTRARY AND LEED CERTIFICATION IS NOT REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; STEEL FRAMING: MINIMUM RECYCLED CONTENT SHALL INCLUDE 50% POST -CONSUMER RECYCLED CONTENT LAMINATING ADHESIVE: ADHESIVE Of JOINT COMPOUND RECOMMENDED FOR DIRECTLY ADHERING GYPSUM PANELS TO CONTINUOUS SUBSTRATE. ADHESIVES SHALL HAVE A VOC CONTENT OF 50 G/L OR LESS WHEN CALCULATED ACCORDING TO 40 CFR 59, SUBPART D (EPA METHOD 24). GYPSUM WALLBOARD: RECYCLED CONTENT SHOULD BE A PRIORITY, LOCALLY MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS SHALL BE SOURCED WHERE POSSIBLE. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES 1. COORDINATION COORDINATE THE WORK OF ALL TRADES INVOLVED IN THE CEILING WORK TO INSURE CLEARANCES FOR FIXTURES, DUCTS, PIPING, CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM, ETC., NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN THE FINISHED CEILING HEIGHTS. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR FINISHED CEILING HEIGHTS. VERIFY IN FIELD. 2. PERIMETER CEILING ANGLES PERIMETER CEILING ANGLE, WHERE OCCURS, SHALL BE INSTALLED TIGHT TO VERTICAL SURFACES, FREE FROM CURVES, BREAKS, OR OTHER IRREGULARITIES, AND PAINTED TO MATCH CEILING FINISH. 3. FIXTURE TRIM FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL FIXTURES, ASSOCIATED TRIM, FIXTURE LAMPS, AND SEISMIC BRACING AS REQUIRED. 4. FIXTURE LOCATIONS LIGHT FIXTURES, EXIT SIGNS, SPRINKLERS, AND OTHER CEILING ELEMENTS SHALL BE LOCATED IN CENTER OF INDIVIDUAL CEILING TILE, U.O.N. ALL SWITCHES AND DIMMERS SHALL BE LOCATED 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTER OF SWITCH, U.O.N. MULTIPLE SWITCHES AT ONE LOCATION SHALL BE GANGED TOGETHER AND FINISHED WITH ONE COVER PLATE, U.O.N. 5. CEILING ACCESS PROVIDE CEILING ACCESS AS REQUIRED FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM MAINTENANCE, AND MATCH ADJACENT CEILING FINISH, U.O.N. 6. SOFFITS AND CEILING HEIGHTS DIMENSIONS ALL SOFFITS AND CEILING HEIGHTS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR TO BOTTOM OF FINISHED GYPBOARD OR CEILING TILE AND SHALL ALLOW FOR THICKNESS OF ALL FLOOR FINISHES. 7. COORDINATION THE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN INDICATES THE LOCATION OF CEILING HEIGHTS, LIGHT TYPES, LIGHT FIXTURES, SWITCH LOCATIONS, AND ASSOCIATED ITEMS. REFER TO ENGINEERING DRAWING (LIGHTING PLAN) FOR CIRCUITING, WIRING LAYOUT, AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 8. DISCREPANCIES IN THE EVENT OF DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTS REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND THE ENGINEER'S LIGHTING PLAN, IMMEDIATELY NOTII THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING BEFORE ORDERING MATERIALS OR PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 9. PLENUM ALL SPECIFIC INFORMATION CONCERNING INSTALLATION OF VARIOUS ABOVE -CEILING ELEMENTS ARE TO BE FOUND IN THE HVAC, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, ELECTRICAL, AND LIGHTING DRAWINGS. 10. CONFLICT NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS OF LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS WITH MAIN RUNNERS, DUCTS, STRUCTURES, HVAC, AND/OR (E)CONDUIT, PRIOR TO FRAMING FOR LIGHTS. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN ARCHITECTS CEILING GRID LOCATION AND ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS ARE TO BE CLARIFIED WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO FRAMING. 11. FIXTURE LAYOUT SUBMIT GRILLE, SPRINKLER, THERMOSTAT, AND OTHER FIXTURE AND ELEMENT LAYOUTS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AT LEAST 2 WEEKS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 12. FIELD VERIFICATION OF WORK VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING, MECHANICAL DUCTS, STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, AND ANY AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE ITEMS; INSTALL APPLICABLE NEW PLUMBING, MECHANICAL FANS, DUCTS, CONDUITS, AND OTHER RELATED AND APPURTENANT ITEN SO AS TO NOT CONFLICT WITH LUMINARIES AND ANY AND ALL FIELD CONDITIONS. 13. UL RATED ASSEMBLIES FURNISH AND INSTALL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL) LABELED DEVICES THROUGHOUT. 14. LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALL LIGHT FIXTURES WITH PROTECTIVE FILM OR SIMILAR COVER OVER LOUVER, LENS, BAFFLE, AND THE LIKE, TO AVOID FIXTURE SOILING OR DAMAGE; FIXTURES SHALL BE MAINTAINED CLEAN AND AS NEW; LAMPS SHALL BE NEW AT PROJECT COMPLETION. 15. LIFE SAFETY DEVICES REFER TO ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ALL LIFE SAFETY DEVICES REQUIRED BY CODE AND ALL EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURES. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL GOVERN LOCATION OF THESE DEVICES, COORDINATE LOCATION OF DEVICES WITH ALL ARCHITECTURAL DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF BACK BOXES. REVIEW ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND VERIFY LOCATIONS OF EXISTING DEVICES TO REMAIN WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS DURING THE ROUGH -IN PHASE OF PROJECT. 17. WALL SWITCH LOCATIONS TO BE COORDINATED WITH FURNITURE AND WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS PRIOR TO BOX ROUGH -INS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ROUGH -INS. 18. ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS REFER TO ENGINEERING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 19. SUSPENDED CEILING GRID LAYOUT CENTER FULL TILES IN ROOM IN BOTH DIRECTIONS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS UNLESS DIMENSIONED OR NOTED OTHERWISE. POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN NOTES 1. OVERTIME WORK WHEN FLOOR BELOW IS OCCUPIED, PRICE EXTENSIVE FLOOR SLAB PENETRATIONS AND/OR CORING ON AN OVERTIME BASIS. ALL CORE AND/OR FLOOR TRENCHING FOR TELEPHONE/ELECTRICAL CONDUITING SHALL BE PERFORMED AFTER HOURS AS REQUIRED AND COORDINATED WITH BUILDING OWNER FOR APPROVAL. 2. COORDINATION OF THE WORK SURVEY FIELD CONDITIONS AND VERIFY THAT WORK IS FEASIBLE AS SHOWN. VERIFY LOCATION OF FLOOR OUTLETS AND OTHER OUTLETS IN RELATION TO STRUCTURAL AND OTHER ELEMENTS AS REQUIRED. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. ELECTRICAL SWITCH AND OUTLET COVER PLATES, SURFACE HARDWARE, ETC., SHALL BE INSTALLED AFTER PAINTING AND/OR APPLICATION OF WALLCOVERINGS AND CARPET SPECIFIED. 3. OUTLET LOCATIONS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS DETERMINE LOCATION AND TYPE (ARCHITECT TO VERIFY WITH ENGINEER) OF ALL OUTLETS AND TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER ALL OTHERS, U.O.N. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER'S POWER PLAN SHALL GOVERN THE WIRING LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH A LAWS APPLICABLE AND ENFORCED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. 4. WALL MOUNTED OUTLETS OUTLETS SHOWN BACK TO BACK ON PARTITION WALLS SHALL BE OFFSET V-0" MAXIMUM, OR MOUNTED AT DIFFERENT HEIGHTS IF INDICATED. 5. FURNITURE LAYOUT FURNITURE, IF SHOWN, IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND IS NOT IN CONTRACT, U.O.N. 6. EQUIPMENT COORDINATION COORDINATE ALL WORK RELATED TO EQUIPMENT WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND INSTRUCTIONS. 7. EXISTING FLOOR PENETRATIONS ALL EXISTING AND NEW UL RATED FLOOR SLAB PENETRATIONS FOR CONDUIT SHALL BE FULLY PACKED AND SEALED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE BUILDING AND FIRE CODES. 8. OUTLET FINISHES REFER TO FINISH PLAN FOR OUTLET AND SWITCH COVERPLATE FINISH. VERIFY SELECTION AND CHOICE WITH THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS. 9. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION COORDINATE NEW ELECTRICAL WITH EXISTING, WHERE OCCURS. 10. OUTLET LAYOUT UPON COMPLETION OF OUTLET LAYOUT, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT. ARCHITECT SHALL SITE VERIFY ALL OUTLET LOCATIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CORING OR OUTLET INSTALLATION. G.C. TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL COVER PLATES FOR ALL WALL MOUNTED ELECTRICAL ANC COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS. 11. UL RATED ASSEMBLIES FURNISH AND INSTALL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) LABELED DEVICES THROUGHOUT. 12. MOUNTING HEIGHTS INSTALL WALL MOUNTED OUTLETS 18 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, U.O.N. HEIGHTS SHALL BE DETERMINED FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO THE CENTERLINE OF COVERPLATE, INSTALLED VERTICALLY, GROUNDING POLE AT BOTTOM, U.O.N. OUTLETS MOUNTED HIGHER THAN 27" SHALL BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY, GROUNDING POLE AT LEFT, U.O.N. FOURPLEX OUTLETS TO BE INSTALLED VERTICALLY, U.O.N. 13. HORIZONTAL CLEARANCES MAINTAIN A 4 -INCH HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE IN ALL DIRECTIONS, MIN. FROM EDGE OF COVERPLATE, FOR WALL MOUNTED OUTLETS, OR FROM ED( OF MONUMENT FOR FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLETS, WHEN ADJACENT TO A WALL, COLUMN, OR SIMILAR ELEMENTS, U.O.N. 14. DIMENSIONS INDICATED DIMENSIONS ARE TO THE CENTER OF THE COVERPLATE OR MONUMENT; CLUSTERS OF OUTLETS ARE DIMENSIONED TO THE CENTER OF THE CLUSTER, U.O.N.; GANG COVERPLATES SHALL BE ONE-PIECE TYPE, U.O.N. 15. CABINETRY OUTLETS INSIDE AND/OR ATTACHED TO CABINETRY SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED TO MATCH SIMILAR CONDITIONS SUCH AS WALL, FLOOR AND THE LIKE. FURNISH AND INSTALL BOX EXTENSION OR OTHER APPROPRIATE DEVICES AS REQUIRED. ADJACENT OUTLETS SHALL NOT BE GREAT THAN 6" O.C. APART, U.O.N. 16. PANEL BOARDS CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE NEATLY TAGGED AND NUMBERED BY G.C. TO CORRESPOND WITH CIRCUITING OUTLINED ON ENGINEERING DRAWINGS 17. DATA AND RECEPTACLES ALL WALL MOUNTED DATA AND VOICE RECEPTACLES TO HAVE 3/4" CONDUIT STUB UP AND TERMINATED 6" ABOVE HUNG CEILING. 18. MILLWORK THE G.C. SHALL COORDINATE ANY ELECTRICAL WORK OR LIGHTING INSTALLATION INTO CABINETWORK IF AND AS REQUIRED. 19. PULL STRINGS G.C. TO PROVIDE PULL STRINGS IN ALL EMPTY CONDUIT. 20. SLAB ON GRADE WHERE FLOOR OUTLETS ARE SHOWN AT SLAB ON GRADE LOCATIONS, SAW CUT AND DEMO EXISTING SLAB AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WORK. EXPOSE (E) SLAB REINFORCING 1'-0" MIN. BACK FROM EA. SAWCUT. PROVIDE NEW SLAB REINFORCING TO MATCH EXISTING. REPAIR AND TAPE JOINTS AT VAPOR BARRIER WHERE ENCOUNTERED. PROVIDE CRUSHED AGGREGATE TO MATCH EXISTING. PROVIDE 3,000 PSI CONCRETE. FINISH T( MATCH EXISTING PER APPLICABLE ACI CRITERIA. 21. ABANDONED CORE/FLOOR PENETRATIONS ALL ABANDONED CORE AND ABANDONED FLOOR PENETRATIONS THAT ARE NOT SCHEDULED TO BE REUSED ARE TO BE REMOVED. FLOOR TO BE REPAIRED AS REQUIRED PER UL AND LOCAL CODE. 22. EXISTING LIFE SAFETY DEVICES GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF EXISTING LIFE SAFETY DEVICES WITH ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND FURNITURE AND WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. ALL DEVICES THAT ARE IN CONFLICTS WITH CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, FURNITURE AND WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE RELOCATED, NOTIFY ARCHITECTS IN WRITING TO CONFIRM NEW LOCATION PRIOR TO RELOCATION OF DEVICES. 23. ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS REFER TO ENGINEERING PLANS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS. DOOR NOTES I HARDWARE NOTES I MILLWORK NOTES 1. DOOR SCHEDULE REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR ALL DOOR/HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS. 2. FIELD MEASURE FIELD MEASURE FLOOR TO CEILING DOORS FOR PROPER FIT. 3. SLOPE EXTERIOR LEVEL LANDING MAY SLOPE UP TO 1/4" PER FOOT MAX. IN ANY DIRECTION FOR SURFACE DRAINAGE. 4. THRESHOLDS THE FLOOR OR LANDING SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 1/2" LOWER THAN THE THRESHOLD OF THE DOORWAY. BEVEL (1:2 MAX. SLOPE) WHERE THE THRESHOLD EXCEEDS 1/4" IN HEIGHT. 5. DOOR OPENINGS DOOR OPENINGS IN PARTITIONS NOT DIMENSIONED ARE TO BE LOCATED WITHIN 4" OF ADJOINING PARTITION, U.O.N. 6. GLASS ALL GLASS IN DOORS SHALL BE TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS, U.O.N. 7. HOLLOW METAL DOORS HOLLOW METAL DOORS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH SEMI -GLOSS PAINT. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 8. EXIT CORRIDORS DOORS OPENING INTO REQUIRED EXIT CORRIDORS DO NOT RESTRICT THE REQUIRED WIDTH WHEN OPENED IN ANY POSITION. 9. DOOR SWINGS ALL DOORS REQUIRED AS EXITS SHALL SWING IN THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. 10. WOOD SPECIES FOR DOOR FACINGS PROVIDE DOORS MADE WITH ADHESIVES AND COMPOSITE WOOD PRODUCTS WHERE POSSIBLE THAT DO NOT CONTAIN UREA FORMALDEHYDE. 11. WOOD ORIGINS: ALL WOOD UTILIZED ON THE JOB (SOLID LUMBER AND TIMBER PANEL PRODUCTS PLUS FINISHED WOOD) SHOULD ORIGINATE FROM REGIONAL SOURCES AND FROM CERTIFIED AND SUSTAINABLE SOURCES (SUCH AS SUSTAINABLE FORESTRY INITIATIVE, CSA, FORESTRY STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL, OR AMERICAN TREE FARM SYSTEMS). 12. ADHESIVES & SEALANTS: THE VOC CONTENT OF ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS USED SHALL BE LESS THAN THE CURRENT VOC CONTENT LIMITS OF SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) RULE #1168, AND ALL SEALANTS USED AS FILLERS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT REGULATION 8, RULE 51. I SPRINKLER NOTES I 1. LAYOUT SEE DESIGN BUILD ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF RISERS, MAINS, HEADS, BRANCH PIPING, ETC., AND ALL WORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THIS PROJECT. SUBMIT PLANS TO OWNER AND OBTAIN THEIR REVIEW PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY SPRINKLER WORK. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS WHERE REQUIRED, COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 2. FIRE WATCH G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR TEMPORARY FIRE WATCH AND ALL PROTECTIVE MEASURES REQUIRED BY OWNER WHEN SYSTEM IS MADE INACTIVE TO ACCOMMODATE SPRINKLER WORK. 3. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL FINAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS OF COMPLETED WORK REQUIRED BY THE OWNER PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY OF SPACE. G.C. SHALL PROPERLY TEST AND INSPECT EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK, AND SHALL NOTIFY BUILDING OWNER AND ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF REPAIR WORK OF EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS REQUIRED. 4. TEMPORARY DISCONNECT G.C. SHALL COORDINATE ARRANGEMENTS FOR TEMPORARY DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT OF FIRE SYSTEMS WITH OWNER. 5. PERMITS AND APPROVALS G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING PERMITS AND APPROVALS REQUIRED BY BUILDING INSPECTORS AND FIRE MARSHAL IN CONJUNCTION WITH CHANGES TO EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM. 6. LOCATIONS ALL SPRINKLER HEADS (BUILDING STANDARD TYPE) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE CENTER OF CEILING TILES. ANY DEVIATION TO THIS NOTE MUST BE REVIEWED WITH BUILDING OWNER PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH WORK. PROVIDE CONCEALED HEADS AT ALL GYP. BD. CEILINGS. CENTER HEADS WITH ADJACENT DEVICES AT GYPSUM BOARD CEILING IN PUBLIC AREAS SUCH AS LOBBIES, RECEPTIONS, AND CONFERENCE ROOMS. THESE DEVICES INCLUDE BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPEAKERS, EXIT SIGNS, SMOKE DETECTORS, MOTION SENSORS, AND ACCESS PANELS. 1. LOCKSETS 1. BLOCKING ALL LOCKSETS SHALL HAVE LIPS OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO CLEAR TRIM AND PROTECT CLOTHING. ALL BLOCKING REQUIRED SHALL BE SCRIBED TO WALL OR CEILING, G.C. TO CHECK JOB PROGRESS AND COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES INVOLVED. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL BLOCKING REQUIRED; UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL "EXTRA" WORK BE AUTHORIZED FOR EXTRA 2. COORDINATION BLOCKING. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE HARDWARE PURCHASE, SPECIFICATION, AND INSTALLATION WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT. 2. SHOP DRAWINGS 3. KEYING THE G.C. SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW. KEYING OF CYLINDER LOCKS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER; FOR ESTIMATE USE GRANDMASTER KEYING CHARGE. UNDER OWNER'S DIRECTION, KEY TO NEW OR EXISTING SYSTEM TO BE APPROVED BY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IN WRITING. FURNISH CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM 3. FIELD CONDITIONS WITH KEYS WHICH CAN BE RENDERED INOPERATIVE BY THE TURN OF THE CHANGE KEY. STAMP ALL KEYS "DO NOT DUPLICATE". FOR PROTECTION PRIOR TO THE START OF FABRICATION, THE G.C. SHALL CHECK AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS AT JOB SITE AND SHALL BE OF THE OWNER, ALL LOCKS AND CYLINDERS SHALL BE KEYED AT THE FACTORY OF THE LOCK MANUFACTURER WHERE PERMANENT RECORDS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAME. MAINTAINED. 4. JOINERY 4. HINGES WHERE MEMBERS ARE MITERED OR BUTTED, THEY SHALL BE JOINED AND SECURED IN A MANNER TO INSURE AGAINST THE JOINT OPENING. FURNISH TWO PAIR HINGES PER LEAF, U.O.N. FURNISH HINGES WITH STAINLESS STEEL PINS AND CONCEALED BEARINGS. SIZE LISTED IN HARDWARE SETS INDICATE HEIGHT. 5. FABRICATION ALL OF THE WORK SHALL BE FABRICATED, ASSEMBLED, FINISHED, AND ERECTED IN THE BEST METHOD KNOWN TO THE CABINET TRADE. 5. SILENCERS SURFACES SHALL BE TRUE, STRAIGHT, AND FREE FROM ALL MACHINE AND TOOLS MARKINGS, BRUISES, INDENTATIONS, CHIPS, OR ABRASIONS. FURNISH SILENCERS FOR ALL INTERIOR FRAMES: 3 FOR SINGLE DOORS, 4 FOR PAIR OF DOORS. OMIT WHERE SOUND OR LIGHT SEAL OCCURS. 6. FIELD VERIFICATION 6. LOCKS IT SHALL BE THE G.C.'S RESPONSIBILITY TO HAVE EXAMINED THE JOB SITE IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PROJECT DOCUMENTS SO AS TO BE LOCK TO BE 38" FROM BOTTOM OF DOOR TO CENTER OF LEVER U.N.O. SATISFIED AS TO THE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE WORK WILL BE PERFORMED, INCLUDING SUCH MATTERS AS UNLOADING FACILITIES, LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF ELEVATORS, EQUIPMENT, OR FACILITIES NEEDED PRELIMINARY TO AND DURING THE WORK, AND OTHER CONDITIONS INSTALLATION: WHICH MAY AFFECT THE WORK. A. INSTALL EACH HARDWARE ITEM PER MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. DO NOT INSTALL SURFACE MOUNTED ITEMS UNTIL FINISHES HAVE BEEN COMPLETED ON THE SUBSTRATE. SET UNITS LEVEL, PLUMB, AND TRUE TO LINE AND LOCATION. ADJUST AND 7. PROTECTION REINFORCE THE ATTACHMENT SUBSTRATE AS NECESSARY FOR PROPER INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. THE G.C. SHALL MAINTAIN REASONABLE PROTECTION TO SAFEGUARD HIS WORK FROM DAMAGE AND TO PROTECT BUILDING OWNER'S PROPERTY FROM INJURY OR LOSS ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ALL PROJECT WORK. B. ADJUST AND CHECK EACH OPERATING ITEM OF HARDWARE AND EACH DOOR TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OR FUNCTION OF EVERY UNIT. REPLACE UNITS WHICH CANNOT BE ADJUSTED TO OPERATE FREELY AND SMOOTHLY. 8. GUARANTEE THE G.C. SHALL GUARANTEE THAT ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE OF THE QUALITY SPECIFIED AND SHOWN AND THAT ANY 7. FAILSAFE DEFECT DUE TO IMPROPER WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS DISCOVERED AND MADE KNOWN WITHIN ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ALL ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SHALL BE FAILSAFE AND TIED INTO THE LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE INSTALLATION SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED WITH REASONABLE PROMPTNESS WITHOUT ADDITIONAL HARDWARE GROUPS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR COMPLETE OPERATION. COST. ARCHITECT WILL GIVE NOTICE OF SUCH OBSERVED DEFECTS WITH REASONABLE PROMPTNESS. 8. ELECTRONIC HARDWARE 9. INSTALLATION ALL EAT DOORS SCHEDULED WITH ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SHALL UNLOCK UPON THE ACTUATION OF A LIFE SAFETY DEVICE. ALL DOORS G.C. SHALL SHIM AND LEVEL COUNTERTOPS ABOVE FILES AFTER FILES ARE INSTALLED BY OTHERS. FILES IN OPERATIONS AREA TO BE REQUIRED AS EXITS WITH ELECTRONIC HARDWARE UNLOCK UPON THE LOSS OF POWER CONTROLLING THE LOCK OR LOCK MECHANISM. ALL SHIMMED AND SECURED TO MILLWORK AFTER THEY ARE SET IN PLACE. G.C. TO LEVEL FLOOR UNDER FILES IN ALL AREAS WHERE FILES ARE DOORS REQUIRED AS EXITS WITH ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SHALL HAVE THE CAPABILITY OF BEING UNLOCKED BY A SIGNAL FROM THE FIRE GANGED OR INSTALLED BELOW FIXED CABINETRY. (PLASTIC LAMINATED SHIMS AS REQUIRED AT FILE CABINET AREA). COMMAND CENTER IN HIGHRISE BUILDINGS WHERE APPLICABLE. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, HARDWARE GROUPS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION. 10. FINISH ALL MILLWORK SHALL RECEIVE FINAL FINISH AT THE SHOP OR FACTORY PRIOR TO DELIVERY. G.C. SHALL PROTECT ALL FINISHED AND 9. DELAYED EGRESS ELECTRIC HARDWARE INSTALLED MILLWORK FROM DAMAGE BY OTHER TRADES. DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE MILLWORK SHALL BE REPLACED BY THE G.C. AT HIS EMERGENCY LIGHTING AND AUDIBLE ALARM SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL DOORS REQUIRED AS EXITS WITH DELAYED EGRESS ELECTRIC HARDWARE. EXPENSE. ALARM SHALL NOTIFY TENANT FLOOR AND CUSTOMER'S BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM. 11. COORDINATION 10. DOOR HANDLES MILLWORK CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, AND COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS AND INSTALL GROMMETS IN ALL DOORS WITH LOCK SETS AND LATCH SETS SHALL HAVE A LEVER HANDLE. COUNTERTOP SURFACES AS REQUIRED TO CONCEAL CABLES. 11. MOUNTING HEIGHTS 12. SHELVING HAND -ACTIVATED DOOR OPENING HARDWARE MUST BE MOUNTED BETWEEN 30 AND 44 INCHES ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. NO UNBRACED LENGTH OF SHELVING AND OR COUNTER WORK SHALL EXCEED 3'-0" WITHOUT ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS AND OR BLOCKING. ALL END CONDITIONS SHALL BE PROPERLY BLOCKED AND OR SUPPORTED. 12. DOOR HARDWARE DOOR HARDWARE SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH A SINGLE EFFORT WITHOUT REQUIRING THE ABILITY TO GRASP THE HARDWARE (LEVER OR PUSH TYPE 13. OVERHEAD CABINETS IS ACCEPTABLE PER LOCAL JURISDICTION CODE DEFINED CRITERIA) ALL BLOCKING AND WOOD CLEATS FOR OVERHEAD CABINETS TO BE SCREWED AND SECURED TO FULL HEIGHT OR BRACED CEILING HEIGHT METAL STUDS AND WOOD GROUNDS. 13. CARD READERS CARD READER DEVICES TO BE PROVIDED AS REFERENCED IN DOOR SCHEDULE. ALL DEVICES AND INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL 14. WOOD ORIGINS: APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE, HARDWARE GROUPS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION. ALL WOOD UTILIZED ON THE JOB (SOLID LUMBER AND TIMBER PANEL PRODUCTS PLUS FINISHED WOOD) SHALL ORIGINATE FROM REGIONAL SOURCES AND FROM CERTIFIED AND SUSTAINABLE SOURCES (SUCH AS SUSTAINABLE FORESTRY INITIATIVE, CSA, FORESTRY STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL, OR AMERICAN TREE FARM SYSTEMS). 15. ADHESIVES & SEALANTS: THE VOC CONTENT OF ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS USED SHALL BE LESS THAN THE CURRENT VOC CONTENT LIMITS OF SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) RULE #1168, AND ALL SEALANTS USED AS FILLERS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT REGULATION 8, RULE 51. FINISH PLAN NOTES 1. FINISHES NO PAINTING OR INTERIOR FINISHING SHALL BE DONE UNDER CONDITIONS WHICH WILL JEOPARDIZE THE QUALITY OR APPEARANCE OF SUCH WORK. ALL WORKMANSHIP WHICH IS JUDGED LESS THAN FIRST QUALITY BY THE ARCHITECT WILL BE REJECTED. 2. COLOR SELECTION ALL COLORS ARE TO BE SELECTED BY THE ARCHITECT, U.O.N. 3. FINISH PREPARATION ALL SURFACES SHALL BE PREPARED TO RECEIVE THE SCHEDULED FINISH PER MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS. ALL GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS SHALL BE TAPED AND SANDED SMOOTH. PAINT GRADE WOODWORK SHALL BE HAND SANDED BETWEEN COATS AND DUSTED CLEAN. ALL HOLES, PITCH POCKETS, OR SAPPY PORTIONS SHALL BE SCRAPED AND SEALED WITH KNOT SEALER. NAIL HOLES, CRACKS, OR DEFECTS SHALL BE PUTTIED AFTER FIRST COAT, WITH PUTTY MATCHING COLOR OF STAIN OR PAINT FINISH. REMOVE OIL OR GREASE WITH MINERAL SPIRITS. ALL CRACKS, HOLES, IMPERFECTIONS IN EXISTING WALLS, PARTITIONS, OR GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHALL BE FILLED WITH PATCHING PLASTER AND SMOOTHED OFF TO MATCH ADJOINING SURFACES. INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD SURFACES SHALL BE WIPED WITH A DAMP CLOTH JUST PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF THE FIRST COAT, IN ORDER TO LAY FLAT ANY NAP WHICH MAY HAVE FORMED IN SANDING PROCESS. WHERE APPLICABLE EXISTING PLASTER AND CONCRETE STRUCTURE SCHEDULED TO BE EXPOSED SHALL BE FINISHED TO PROVIDE A LEVEL 3 FINISH UNO. 4. WORK AREA CLEAN UP UPON COMPLETION, REMOVE ALL PAINT FROM WHERE IT HAS SPILLED, SPLASHED, OR SPLATTERED ON EXPOSED SURFACES. 5. STAINING VENEER ALL VENEER STAINS SHALL HAVE UNIFORM COLOR. 6. TOUCH UP EXAMINE ALL FINISH SURFACES AFTER COMPLETION OF WORK, INCLUDING WOOD FLOORING AND MILLWORK INSTALLATION, AND PROCEED WITH "TOUCH-UP" AS REQUIRED. 7. FINISH APPROVAL PROVIDE ARCHITECT WITH A MINIMUM OF (3) 8" X 10" BRUSH -OUTS OF EACH COLOR AND FINISH FOR ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL AT LEAST 2 WEEKS PRIOR TO SITE APPLICATION. ON-SITE APPLICATION WILL BE REQUIRED ONE WEEK PRIOR TO FINAL APPROVAL. ARCHITECT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ADJUST ANY COLOR/FINISH ONCE THE WALL TEST HAS BEEN MADE. PRIOR TO SITE APPLICATION, PROVIDE ARCHITECT WITH 8" X 10" SAMPLE CUTTINGS FROM ACTUAL DYE LOTS OF ALL SPECIFIED WALLCOVERINGS FOR ARCHITECTS APPROVAL AND PROVIDE EXPECTED DELIVERY DATE TO JOB SITE. 8. SOFFITS UNDERSIDE OF SOFFITS (WHERE OCCURS) TO RECEIVE A FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT VERTICAL FINISH, U.O.N. 9. DELIVERY LEAD TIME CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALLOWING FOR DELIVERY LEAD TIMES FOR ALL FABRICS AND OTHER CUSTOM FINISHES WITHIN THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. ALL DELIVERY TIMES MUST BE CONFIRMED, AND ANY EXCESSIVE LEAD TIME MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECT'S ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY TO ALLOW FOR RE -SPECIFICATION IF NECESSARY. 10. FLOOR SURFACE MODIFICATIONS MODIFY EXISTING FLOOR SURFACES AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW FLOORING MATERIALS, THUS PREVENTING NOTICEABLE LUMPS OR DEPRESSIONS. 11. FINISHES SEE FINISH PLAN, ELEVATIONS, AND DETAILS FOR CLARIFICATION OF EXTENT OF FINISH MATERIALS. 12. JOINTS STAINED AND PAINTED SURFACES SHALL BE FINISHED SUCH THAT JOINTS ARE NOT VISIBLE WHEN VIEWED FROM ANY REASONABLE ANGLE. 13. FLOOR FINISHES ALL INTERSECTIONS OF FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS SHALL BE LOCATED DIRECTLY UNDER CENTER OF DOOR, WHERE OCCURS, U.O.N. 14. CABINETRY ALL OPEN CABINETRY SHALL BE PLASI1C LAMINATE ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES, U.O.N. APPLY WHITE MELAMINE TO INTERIOR OF CABINETRY WITH DOORS AND DRAWERS, U.O.N. 15. CARPET SEAMING PLAN SUBMIT CARPET SEAMING PLAN TO ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING AND AT LEAST (4) WEEKS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR ARCHITECTS REVIEW AND APPROVAL. 16. EXISTING FINISHES EXISTING FINISHES IN BUILDING SERVICE/CORE AREA TO REMAIN, U.O.N. 17. WOOD ORIGINS: ALL WOOD UTILIZED ON THE JOB (SOLID LUMBER AND TIMBER PANEL PRODUCTS PLUS FINISHED WOOD) SHALL ORIGINATE FROM REGIONAL SOURCES AND FROM CERTIFIED AND SUSTAINABLE SOURCES (SUCH AS SUSTAINABLE FORESTRY INITIATIVE, CSA, FORESTRY STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL, OR AMERICAN TREE FARM SYSTEMS). 18. ADHESIVES & SEALANTS: THE VOC CONTENT OF ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS USED SHALL BE LESS THAN THE CURRENT VOC CONTENT LIMITS OF SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD) RULE #1168, AND CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 17 FOR AEROSOL ADHESIVES (CALGREEN 5.504.4.1). ALL SEALANTS USED AS FILLERS MUST MEET OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT REGULATION 8, RULE 51.DONE - 19. PAINT: CONTRACTOR SHALL USE PAINT SPECIFIED BY ARCHITECT AND SHALL PROPERLY PREPARE ALL SURFACES TO RECEIVE ONE (1) PRIME COAT AND (2) FINISH COATS (MIN) OF PAINT IN COLOR SPECIFIED BY ARCHITECT." PROVIDE ADDITIONAL PREPARATION AND FINISH PAINT COATS AS REQUIRED BY PAINT MANUFACTURER. REFER TO SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 20. PAINT MANUFACTURE TO BE AS INDICATED ON THE FINISH SCHEDULE - NO SUBSTITUTIONS U.O.N. 21. EXTRA MATERIALS: FURNISH EXTRA MATERIALS DESCRIBED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THAT ARE FROM THE SAME PRODUCTION RUN (BATCH MIX) AS MATERIALS APPLIED AND ARE PACKAGED FOR STORAGE, IDENTIFIED WITH LABELS DESCRIBING CONTENTS. STORE IN LOCATION MAINTAINING AN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF NOT LESS THAN 45 DEGREES F. -QUANTITY: FURNISH AN ADDITIONAL (5) PERCENT OF EACH MATERIAL AND COLOR SPECIFIED. 22. PAINTS AND COATINGS: PAINT TO COMPLY WITH VOC LIMITS IN THE AIR RESOURCES BOARD ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS SUGGESTED CONTROL MEASURE AND CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 17 FOR AEROSOL PAINTS (CALGREEN 5.504.4.3.1). 23. CARPET: ALL CARPET MUST MEET ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE GREEN LABEL PLUS PROGRAM; 2. CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH STANDARD PRACTICE FOR TESTING OF VOCs (SPECIFICATION 01350); 3. NSF/ANSI 140 AT THE GOLD LEVEL; 4. SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATIONS SYSTEMS SUSTAINABLE CHOICE; OR 5. CALIFORNIA COLLABORATIVE FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE SCHOOLS EQ 2.2 AND LISTED IN THE CHPS HIGH PERFORMANCE PRODUCT DATABASE. AND: CARPET CUSHION MUST MEET CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE GREEN LABEL. INDOOR CARPET ADHESIVE AND CARPET PAD ADHESIVE MUST NOT EXCEED 50 G/L VOC CONTENT. 24. COMPOSITE WOOD: COMPOSITE WOOD MUST MEET CARB AIR TOXICS CONTROL MEASURE FOR COMPOSITE WOOD INCLUDING MEETING THE EMISSIONS LIMITS IN CALGREEN TABLE 5.504.4.5. 25. RESILIENT FLOORING SYSTEMS: FOR 80% OF FLOOR AREA RECEIVING RESILIENT FLOORING, INSTALL RESLIENT FLOORING COMPLYING WITH: 1. CERTIFIED UNDER THE RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING INSTITUTE (RFCI) FLOORSCORE PROGRAM; 2. COMPLIANT WITH THE VOC-EMISSION LIMITS AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH 2010 STANDARD METHOD FOR TESTING AND EVALUATION CHAMBERS V.1.1; 3. COMPLIANT WITH THE COLLABORATIVE FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE SCHOOLS (CHPS) EQ2.2 AND LISTED IN THE CHPS HIGH PERFORMANCE PRODUCT DATABASE, OR 4. CERTIFIED UNDER THE GREENGUARD CHILDREN AND SCHOOLS PROGRAM TO COMPLY WITH CALIFORNIA DEPARTMETN OF PUBLIC HEALTH CRITERIA (CALGREEN 5.504.4.4 AND 5.504.4.6). RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER llflflll • 9: ' • �' , I REGISTERED ILLER INGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R I O R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ., Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 00DF 00 'J'iPLIi\ICE '. ice« u R� a b. E0 0161 a `� 2 Title: E AL Cithy of ¢??A call,` I " - ,R r °C ISI�,0014 A B EGRESS DOOR 119 x 0.15 = 1 CALCULATED E REQUIRED WID- EXIT WIDTH PRI STAIR NORTH D E r_ 01 LIFE SAFETY 1/8" = 1'-0" EGRESS CALCULATIONS OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE - BY OCCUPANCY GROUP LEVEL 1 RI OR ARCHITECTS DOOR STAIR EXIT REQ. EXIT EXIT REQ. EXIT OCCUPANTS WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH STAIR COMPARTMENT OCCUPANCY AREA PER SF OCCUPANTS FACTOR FACTOR FACTOR WIDTH 01 FLOOR B B B 3720 SF 100 1 37.2 0.15 1 5.581 0.2 1 7.44 3720 SF 37.2 5.58 7.44 C C C 3644 SF 20 182.21 0.15 1 27.33 0.2 1 36.44 3644 SF 182.2 27.33 36.44 Lr Lr L 328 SF 100 3.3 0.15 0.491 0.2 0.66 328 SF 3.3 0.49 0.66 Ls Ls L 759 SF 50 15.2 0.15 2.28 0.2 3.04 759 SF 15.2 2.28 3.04 S S S 214 SF 300 0.71 0.15 1 0.111 0.2 1 0.14 214 SF 0.7 0.11 0.14 Grand total 8665 SF 238.6 35.79 47.71 DOORS 119x0.15 = 17.85" CALCULATED EXIT WIDTH: 18" REQUIRED WIDTH: 18" EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 68" ilk 470 MAIM LEVEL 01 KEY PLAN 1 it = 40'-0" DOOR 119 X 0.15 = 17.85" CALCULATED EXIT WIDTH: 18" REQUIRED WIDTH: 18" EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 32" SHEET NOTES 1. WHERE EXISTING RATED CONSTRUCTION IS SHOWN TO REMAIN, CONCEALED CONDITIONS ARE OFTEN ENCOUNTERED PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUESTED TO CONFIRM AS -BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS AS DOCUMENTED. SHOULD UPGRADE TO EXISTING RATED ASSEMBLIES BE REQUIRED, CONTRACTOR TO INFORM ARCHITECT IN WRITING PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 2. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN LOCATIONS. 3. SEE POWER & SIGNAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR CARD READER LOCATIONS. 4. ALL EXISTING FIRE RATINGGS NEED TO BE MAINTAINED. IF DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR FINDS ANY RATINGS COMPROMISED HE MUST INCLUDE REPAIRS AS PART OF HIS SCOPE. 5. EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS TO BE TESTED TO VERIFIY THEY ARE IN COMPLIANCE. EXITING LEGEND C 0 M P Y- EXIT X REQUIRED EXIT &STAIR WIDTH CALCULATIONS ()XX) OCCUPANTS (XXX) OCC. MAX TRUE NORTH NEW CONSTRUCTION EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN NEW 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION NEW 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXISTING 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXIT ACCESS __________________ COMMON PATH OF EGRESS WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY DOOR®� EXIT SIGNAGE FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER RELEASE CABINET WALL MOUNTED CARD READER EXIT/ ACCESS TO EXJTFPR FIRE PROTECTION CR RISER CABINET FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER TRUE NORTH OCCUPANCY TYPE LEGEND CLASSROOM OFFICE LIBRARY/ READING ROOMS LIBRARY/ STACK STORAGE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER ER LDUCATION CORPORATION 645 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WA 98188 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE RI OR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval:__ CODE ODE C� '<APLlr'\ g�aC-E Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 �5cale,� As indicated a EXITING DI! __'° M ` Title: LEVEL 1 Sheet: A B EGRESS DOOR 177 X 0.15 CALCULATE REQUIRED) EXIT WIDTH STAIR NORTH D E 02 LIFE SAFETY 1/8" = 1'-0" EGRESS CALCULATIONS OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE - BY OCCUPANCY GROUP LEVEL 2 RI OR ARCHITECTS DOOR STAIR EXIT REQ. EXIT EXIT REQ. EXIT OCCUPANTS WIDTH WIDTH WIDTH STAIR COMPARTMENT OCCUPANCY AREA PER SF OCCUPANTS FACTOR FACTOR FACTOR WIDTH 02 FLOOR B B I B 3419 SFJ 100 1 34.2 0.15 5.131 0.2 1 6.84 3419 SF 34.2 5.13 6.84 C C C 6391 SFJ 20 1 319.51 0.15 47.931 0.2 1 63.91 6391 SF 319.5 47.93 63.91 S S S 1 94 SFJ 300 1 0.31 0.15 1 0.051 0.2 0.06 94 SF 0.3 0.05 0.06 Grand total 9903 SF 354.0 53.10 70.80 DOORS 177 X 0.15 = 26.55" CALCULATED EXIT WIDTH: 27" REQUIRED WIDTH: 27" EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 68" KEY PLAN n LEVEL 02 KEY PLAN 1 if = 40'-0" DOOR 177 X 0.15 = 26.55" CALCULATED EXIT WIDTH: 27" REQUIRED WIDTH: 27" EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: 32" SHEET NOTES 1. WHERE EXISTING RATED CONSTRUCTION IS SHOWN TO REMAIN, CONCEALED CONDITIONS ARE OFTEN ENCOUNTERED PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUESTED TO CONFIRM AS -BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS AS DOCUMENTED. SHOULD UPGRADE TO EXISTING RATED ASSEMBLIES BE REQUIRED, CONTRACTOR TO INFORM ARCHITECT IN WRITING PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 2. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGN LOCATIONS. 3. SEE POWER & SIGNAL/ ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR CARD READER LOCATIONS. 4. ALL EXISTING FIRE RATINGGS NEED TO BE MAINTAINED. IF DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR FINDS ANY RATINGS COMPROMISED HE MUST INCLUDE REPAIRS AS PART OF HIS SCOPE. 5. EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS TO BE TESTED TO VERIFIY THEY ARE IN COMPLIANCE. EXITING LEGEND REQUIRED EXIT &STAIR WIDTH CALCULATIONS C 0 M P.X - EXIT X (XXX) OCCUPANTS ()XX) OCC. MAX TRUE NORTH NEW CONSTRUCTION EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN NEW 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION NEW 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXISTING 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION EXIT ACCESS __ _ _ _____ _ _ _ _ _ _ COMMON PATH OF EGRESS WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY DOOR IR EXIT SIGNAGE FC FIRE EXTINGUISHER RELEASE CABINET ❑ WALL MOUNTED CARD READER EXIT / ACCESS TO EXIT FPR F R FIRE PROTECTION CR RISER CABINET FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER TRUE NORTH OCCUPANCY TYPE LEGEND CLASSROOM RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER WEST TUKWILA, 98188 9400 OF ILLER INGTON Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE RI OR ARCHITECTS S E ATT L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 @2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK CODE COlMiPLIa; NCE I Job No: 05CEC0.0193.000 �4 ' Scate. ^ As indicated J A�% 01 5 .N Cioy o € IT?'kvvila BUIL DUNG DIV211Oa EXIT G Title: LEVEL 2 FINISH SCHEDULE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE ,COLOR: DUCAT10" O :R P O R A T 1 0 N �� < Q :; :.. I BASE FLOOR - PORCELAIN TILE WALLS - PAINT MILLWORK - SOLID SURFACECAREER- TYPE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. TRIM/ REFL. FINISH LAMP REMARKS NOTE: PROVIDEIINSTALL STRAIGHT VINYL WALL BASE AT ALL CARPETEDAREAS. PROVIDEIINSTALL COVE VINYL WALL BASE AT ALL RESILIENT FLOORING AREAS. REFER TO DETAILS 14815 SHEET A-8.4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. �T MANUFACTURER: DALTILE P MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE i5 MANUFACTURER: AVONITE WATTS OTY/TYPE SYTLE: FOUNDATIONS STYLE: EVER NAME- PURE WHITE 6069 ffffle :16 RECYCLED WHITE F1-8699 EV05 EARTH COLOR NO.: OC -64 FINISH: SATIN 10112 SIZE: 24"X24" FINISH: SATIN, U.O.N. CATION: LOCATION: RECEPTION DESK TRANSACTION TOP B 1 E MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE GROUT: 11/,"WIDE LATICRETE 24 NATURAL GREY " LOCATION: GENERAL THROUGHOUT, U.O.N. MILLWORK -PLASTIC LAMINATE COLOR: 63 BURNT UMBER INSTALLATION: MONOLITHIC NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" F3 DOWNLIGHT - 6" RECESSED FLUORESCENT LIGHTOLIER CALCULITE CFL OPEN DOWNLIGHT: 8021 CCLWIS6132BU CLEARIWHITE 32W (lym RECESSED MOUNTED 'L MANUFACTURER: ABPA USA SIZE 1 STYLE: CH ROLLED GOODS CONTACT" AMANDA WOOD (312) 256.1615 COLOR: 2206 TITANIUM NEBULA LOCATION: USED THROUGHOUT, U.O.N. F4 WALL WASHER - 6" APERTURE COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHTOLIER CALCULITE CFL OPEN WALL WASHER: 8021WW CCLWI S6132BU CLEARIWHITE 32W (1)/ITT RECESSED MOUNTED PT B2 MANUFACTURER: DALTILE 2 B MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE FINISH: ERRE FINISH WINTER LAKE LOCAT IONNAMF-: VERTICAL SURFACES, AS NOTED F5 PERIMETER TROUGH RECESSED DIRECT LOUVER (TOILET ROOMS) LIGHTOLIER LIGHTING SYSTEMS: PTS7 -1 SERIES WHITE (1)/T8 RECESSED MOUNTED. GC TO DETERMINE EXACT LENGTHS AND QTY REQUIRED TO PROVIDE FULL LENGTH FIXTURE AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS -PROVIDE (LC) If INSTALLED IN CHICAGO. STYLE: FABRI4UE COLOR NO.: SW2129-50 COLOR: P690 GRIS LINEN FINISH: SATIN, U.O.N. PL 2 MANUFACTURER: FORMICA F6 1X4 LINEAR LITHONIA SB2-32WT8-MVOLT-GEB101S - 32W (2)TB CEILING MOUNTED SIZE: 24"X24" LOCATION: ACCENT WALLS - SEE PLANS COLOR: STORM SOLIDZ 3505-58 BUILDING 7 �� WEST TUKWILiA,98188 GROUT: 1,8 ^ WIDE LATICRETE 24 NATURAL GREY NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" FINISH: - F7 2'X4' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE II: CFS2GPF332UNVH3C (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 32W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - (SINGLE BALLAST) [TYPICAL CORRIDORS AND OFFICES] CONTACT AMANDA WOOD (312) 256-1615 LOCATION: HORIZONTAL SURFACES, AS NOTED FLOOR - RESILIENT P MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE F8 2'X2' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE 11: CFS2GPF317UNVH3C (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 17W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - (SINGLE BALLAST) [TYPICAL CORRIDORS AND OFFICES] RF MANUFACTURER: MOHAWK HARD SURFACES 3L MANUFACTURER: PIONITE TURQUOISE POWDER STYLE: CLASSIC COLOR: AG601 PEARL OF THE ORIENT COLOR NO.: 2057-50 F9 2'X4' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE 0: CFS2GPF332UNVH3C (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 32W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - COORDINATE TO WORK WITH MULTI -SWITCH LOCATIONS. REFER TO RCP FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. [CLASSROOMS/LABS] COLOR: WP -703 FINISH: SUEDE FINISH: SATIN, U.O.N. . SIZE: 7.25" X 48" PLANKS LOCATION: VERTICAL SURFACES, AS NOTED LOCATION: ACCENT WALLS - SEE PLANSF10 212' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE II: CF2GPF317UNVH3C (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 17W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - COORDINATE TO WORK WITH MULTI -SWITCH LOCATIONS. REFER TO RCP FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. [CLASSROOMS/LABS] INSTALLATION: SEE FINISH PLAN FOR PATTERN DIRECTION NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" CONTACT: ERIN HASE (312) 330.6794 4 MANUFACTURER: WILSONART F11 2'X4' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE 11: CF2GPF332UNVHIC (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 32W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - PROVIDE DUAL BALLAST OPTIONS WHERE SHOWN ON CEILING PLANS. [COMPUTER ROOMS] COLOR: 4882-38 OILED SOAPSTONE F2F MANUFACTURER: LSI FLOORS e 4UULUK MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE FINISH: STYLE: STAINED CONCRETE F12 2'X2' FLUORESCENT DIRECTIINDIRECT LIGHTOLIER COFFAIRE 11: CF2GPF317UNVHIC (MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 17W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - PROVIDE DUAL BALLAST OPTIONS WHERE SHOWN ON CEILING PLANS. [COMPUTER ROOMS] PILGRIM HAZE LOCATION: HORIZONTAL SURFACES, AS NOTED COLOR: PEPPER SAND STC 2195NAME- COLOR NO.: 2132-50 SIZE: 24" X 24" X 0.098" F13 2'X4' DIRECTIINDIRECT (DIMMABLE) LIGHTOLIER CFS2GPF332UNV-XX•C(MOD896) CLEARIWHITE 32W (3)T8 CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - SUPPLY DIMMING BALLAST- COORDINATE WTIH DIMMING SYSTEM SPECIFIED BY ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS. [DENTAL AREA OVER DENTAL CHAIRS -KENNEL ROOM -SURGERY FOR VET TECH - GENERAL SURGERY? - XRAY?] FINISH: SATIN, U.O.N. PL a MANUFACTURER: WILSONART INSTALLATION: RANDOM LOCATION: ACCENT WALLS - SEE PLANS COLOR: 4830.18 SATIN STAINLESS CPT 2 MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT CONTACT: STEVE SCHOEPKE (847) 909-9869 2'X2' DIRECT/INDIRECT p (DIMMABLE) RECESSED MOUNTED - SUPPLY DIMMING BALLAST - COORDINATE WTIH DIMMING SYSTEM SPECIFIED BY ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS. CHICAGO PLENUM, RECESSED MOUNTED - SUPPLY DIMMING BALLAST • COORDINATE WTIH DIMMING SYSTEM SPECIFIED BY IRE 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" FINISH: STANDARD STYLE: DIFFUSED TILE SC ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS. [DENTAL AREA OVER DENTAL CHAIRS -KENNEL ROOM -SURGERY FOR VET TECH - GENERAL SURGERY? - X-RAY? LOCATION: SEE ELEVATIONS COLOR: R878Y-0 CUSTOM RF 3 MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE SIZE: 24" X 24" STYLE: GRANIT IQ LINOLEUM BP 5WLUK MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE PL 6 MANUFACTURER: NEVAMAR INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN COLOR: 435 ECLIPSE CEILING WHITE COLOR: VA5001T SERENE STARDOM CONTACT: IRIS ROBINSON KEENE (312) 467-1331 x3237 TYPE: SHEET COLOR NO.: 258 SIZE: 6-6"WX82-7"LX 0.08"THICK FINISH: FLAT FINISH: TEXTURED F17 DECORATIVE PENDANT DELRAY ASPECT: 22775 -1.32 -VOLT -E - 32W (1) CFL CEILING MOUNTED AT +T-0" TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE cPT 3 MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT INSTALLATION: REFER TO PLAN LOCATION:_GYF wttl' LOCATION: SEE ELEVATIONS STYLE: CLASSICAL TILE 59331 WELDROD: 1288327BULKHEADS NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" F18 SURFACE MOUNTED DECORATIVE PENDANT DELRAY ASPECT: 2275-S•0.32-VOLT•E - 32W (1) CFL SURFACE MOUNTED AT 7'-6" FROM FRINISHED FLOOR TO THE BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE COLOR: SERENADE 30505 CONTACT: IVANA ROSICH (773) 318-0630 PL 7 MANUFACTURER: ARPA USA SIZE: 24" X 24" COLOR: 21516 IRIDESCENT WHITE F19 UNDER FLUORESCENT STRIP ALKCO SFHP 1001200 SERIES T5 LENGTH VARIES, G.C. TO VERIFY LENGTH VERY PER PLAN. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO DETERMINE EXACT RUN LENGTHS. FIXTURES TO RUN ENTIRE LENGTH OF UPPER CABINETS. PROVIDE FIXTURE DRAWINGS INDICATING QUANTITY AND LENGTH TO ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING FIXTURES. REFER TO MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION NOTES FOR CONNECTORS, MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FIXTURES THAT CAN BE INTERCONNECTED AND MAX. DISTANCE IN BETWEEN INTERCONNECTED FIXTURES. INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN VCT 1 MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG FINISH: PIXEL FINISH CONTACT: IRIS ROBINSON KEENE (312) 467.1331 x3237 STYLE: TFXTIIRF LOCATION: VERTICAL SURFACES, AS NOTED COLOR: 51807 SHADOW BLUE cPT 4 MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT SIZE: 12" X 12" PL 8 MANUFACTURER: WILSONART STYLE: APPLIED TILE 5TO04 INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN COLOR: 790HO FUSION MAPLE F21 DOWNLIGHT DIMMABLE 6" RECESSED FLUORESCENT LIGHTOLIER CALCULITE: 8021CCLW/S6132B-XX CLEARIWHITE 32W (1)/TU SUPPLY DIMMING BALLAST- COORDINATE WTIH DIMMING SYSTEM SPECIFIED BY ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS. COLOR: BEAM 04557 FINISH: VCT 2 MANUFACTURER: MANNINGTON COMMERCIAL SIZE: 24" X 24" LOCATION: SEE ELEVATIONS WALL WASHER DIMMABLE - 6" FLUORESCENT INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN STYLE: DESIGNER ESSENTIALS CONTACT: IRIS ROBINSON KEENE (312) 467-1331 x3237 COLOR: 244 NEW EGGPLNAT PL 9 MANUFACTURER: NEVEMAR F23 214' FLUORESCENT DIRECT/INDIRECT tIGHTCHER eF82GPf232UNVHI (MOD896) etEARIWMITE 32W (2)" REeESSEB M9UNTEB (SINSEE BAI:I:A6T) IYSE T9 REBUIRE 1:8AB FOR ENERG� 89BEI SIZE: 12" X 12" COLOR: MXT002T STAINLESS METALX TEXTURED cPr 5 MANUFACTURER: SHAW CONTRACT INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN DIRECTIINDIRECT FINISH: TEXTURED STYLE: PRAIRIE TILE 59525 VCT 3 MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG LOCATION: VERTICAL SURFACES, AS NOTED , FLUORESCENT COLOR: TIMBERLINE 23715 DIRECTIINDIRECT etEARMINTE STYLE: SIZE: 24" X 24" 10 10 MANUFACTURER: PIONITE ' INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN COLOR: 51866 LITTLE GREEN APPLE COLOR: AB291 BRIDE OF THE SEA DIRECTIINDIRECT CONTACT: IRIS ROBINSON KEENE (312) 467.1331 x3237 SIZE: 12" X 12" INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN BP 8GULUK MANUFACTURER: BENJAMIN MOORE FINISH: SUEDE DIRECTIINDIRECT GEORGIAN GREEN LOCATION: HORIZONTAL SURFACES, AS NOTED F28 TRACK LIGHT & TRACK LIGHTOLIER LLA1135BK/LLARFSOL BLACK/CLEAR LENS 23W LED 3500K. PROVIDE LYTESPAN TRACK AND ALL VISIBLE COMPONENTS IN BLACK COLOR. VCT 4 MANUFACTURER: NOT USED COLOR NO.: HC -115 RESIN PANEL STYLE: FINISH: SATIN, U.O.N. RP 1 MANUFACTURER: 3FORM F29 PENDANT LINEAR INDIRECT BARTCO IEL5H-2$W-PRS•CM96•WH WHITE (1) T5H0 SUSPENDED FROM DECK ABOVE. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE A7 &'-3" A.F.F., VERIFY LENaTN IN FIELD, PROVIDE MULTIPLE FIXTURES FOR MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS COVERAGE COLOR: LOCATION: ACCENT WALLS •SEE PLANS STYLE: CUSTOM SIZE: NOTE: BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT TO BE PROVIDED "NO EXCEPTIONS" COLOR: CUSTOM F30 DECORATIVE PENDANT (CORPDOPARCHITECTURAL IMPACT LIGHTING P3008-132•SM-BKPC SILVER METALLIC 32W (1) CFL SUSPENDED FROM DECK ABOVE. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE AT8'-3" A.F.F. INSTALLATION: GAUGE: 318" FLOOR - TRANSITION STRIP FINISH: - F31 DOWNLIGHT 6" SUSPENDED FLUORESCENT CONTACT LIGHTING CF832PCPCSK36-P WHITE 32W (1) CFL SUSPENDED FROM DECK ABOVE. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE AT 8'-6" A.F.F. VCT B MANUFACTURER: NOT USED BMANUFACTURER: 1 CERAMIC TOOL COMPANY HARDWARE: SUSPENSION SYSTEM STYLE: F32 DECORATIVE PENDANT (RECE TION)FOCAL POINT FGRF•1.32TT-VOLT•C144•L835-NA NATURAL ANODIZE 32W (1) TT CFL SUSPENDED FROM DECK ABOVE. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE AT 8'-3" A.F.F. CONTACT: CHRIS JANSON (773) 368-6770 STYLE: CTC 14 BCT COLOR: COLOR: ANODIZED ALUMINUM SIZE: F33 DECORATIVE PENDANT FOCAL POINT FGRC-1-26TT•E-VOLT•C144•L835•NA NATURAL ANODIZE 26W (1) TT CFL SURFACE MOUNTED. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE AT 6'-6" A.F.F. RP B MANUFACTURER: 3FORM CONTACT: KRISTY BURLINGAME (630) 816-0456 INSTALLATION: STYLE: WOVIN WALL F34 DECORATIVE PENDANT FOCAL POINT FGRC•1-26TT-E-VOLT-C144•L835-NA NATURAL ANODIZE 26W (1) TT CFL SURFACE MOUNTED. BOTTOM OF THE FIXTURE AT 8'-3" A.F.F. COLOR: CHILL +CHILL . 2 e MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE VCT e MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG GAUGE: 1116" F35 LED STRIP LIGHT ILLUMINII LL2.OH35KF-M LED SEE RCP FOR OVERALL SIZE STYLE: STANDARD EXCELON SDT STYLE: CTA -XXX -A FINISH: COLOR: 51955 MOSS GREEN WALL -CERAMIC TILE COLOR: 63 BURNT UMBER SIZE: 12" X 12" 1 B MANUFACTURER: DALTILE HARDWARE: ALUMINUM BRACKETS F36 ADJUSTABLE MONOPOINT HALO LAMPHOLDER: LZR1320-MB MONOPOINi FEED: LZR209-u18 MB (SATIN BLACK) 50W PAR20 HALOGEN PROVIDE DIMMING BALLAST. LOCATION: REFER TO FINISH PLAN INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN COLOR: GLOSS ARCTIC WHITE 6470 CONTACT: JILL OLSON (312) 371-1604 0 0 I SS 0 G S C 0 1 0 13.1 OTHER ACCEPTED. "REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION" SHALL BE SUBMITTED IN A TIMELY FASHION AS TO ALLOW THE ARCHITECT AND/OR ARCHITECT'S CONSULTANT TO REVIEW INFORMATION AND PROVIDE A RESPONSE. ANY ADDITIONAL COSTS FOR USE OF ACCEPTED SUBSTITUTION SHALL BE INCURRED BY G•C., WHICH INCLUDES, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY ADDITIONAL DESIGN/COORDINATION BY ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OTHER CLIENT CONSULTANT. IN ALL INSTANCES, ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS GOVERN. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES. NOTE: VCT -6 TO RECEIVE GROUNDING BARS AS REQUIRED BY SDT MANUFACTURER. INSTALL TILE PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. SIZE 2"X2" 03 MANUFACTURER: CERAMIC TOOL COMPANY CEILING GROUT " " " 118 WIDE; MAPS WHITE 00 ACT 1 MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG NOTE: ALL FIXTURES DENOTED WITH "E" TO HAVE EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK - REFER TO ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. STYLE: CTC 38 BCT LOCATION: TOILET ROOM WALLS GRID: PRELUDE XL 15/16 IN. EXPOSED TEE COLOR: ANODIZED ALUMINUM vcT 7 MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE NOTES: �� 4 WALL BASE CT -1 CONTACT: KRISTY BURLINGAME (630) 816.0456 STYLE: AZROCK COLLECTION GLASS GRID SIZE: 24 X 48 CITRECEIVED ILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER COLOR: VS300 BLACK GL 1 SPECIFICATION: CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS TILE: CIRRUS SECOND LOOK 11 #513 MANUFACTURER: TBD SIZE: 12" X 12" SIZE: VARIES F. BEVELED TEGULAR INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN TILE COLOR: WHITE STYLE: TBD LOCATION: PRIVATE OFFICE SIDE LIGHTS, VIEWING WINDOWS INTERIOR.. 1A ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 ©2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. arLvo UNPUBLISHEDW NGS DWORK�OFnTHEE AIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE RCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY ORIGINAL NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: LOCATION: THROUGHOUT, U.O.N. COLOR: TBD vcT 8 MANUFACTURER: JOHNSONITE LOCATION: REFER TO FINISH PLAN STYLE: AZROCK COLLECTION THICKNESS: *1/4" N FOR INSET DOOR VIEWING PANES *318" FOR SIDELIGHTS & VIEWING WINDOWS ACT 2 MANUFACTURER: CERTAINTEED GRID: 1942-THB•5 FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE COLOR: VS304 WHITE NOTE: REFER TO SCHEDULE FOR RATING GRID SIZE: 24 X 24 1T MANUFACTURER: DALTILE SIZE: 12 X 12 " " TILE: THEATER BLACK f INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN STYLE: KEYSTONES WOOD PROM F. 1", TRIM COLOR: DESERT GRAY SPECKLE D200 CT 9IMFhKIAL MANUFACTURER: ARMSTRONG WD tE SPECIES: MAPLE TILE COLOR: BLACK SIZE: 1" X 1"; 4" BASE STYLE: TFYTI IRF CUT: 1/4 CUT LOCATION: SOUND STUDIO, AS SHOWN ON PLANS GROUT: '/,"WIDE; MAPEI PEARL GRAY 19 COLOR: 51927 FIELD GRAY FINISH: MATCH STAIN/ COLOR OF PL -8 WINDOW FILM LOCATION: TOILET ROOM FLOORS, THROUGHOUT SIZE: 12"X 12" LOCATION: ALL DOORS U.O.N. 1 a MANUFACTURER: VISTA WINDOW FILM CONTACT: AMANDA WOOD (312) 256.1615 INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN NOTE: STAIN TO MATCH ARCHITECTS SAMPLE STYLE: ENERLOGIC SERIES ` 1' J WALL COVERING MUUhL VEP35 SR CDF WC MANUFACTURER: MAHARAM LOCATION: REFER TO PARTITION PLAN STYLE: RANGE 399543154" WIDE F 2 MANUFACTURER: 3M COLOR: NEST 004 SIZE: 54" WIDE STYLE: DUSTED CRYSTAL, 7725-314 CONTACT: BRIAN BUCKLEY (312) 339.5839 LOCATION: RESTROOM CLERESTORY NOTE: PROVIDE (1) ONE ADDITIONAL DOUBLE ROLL FOR ATTIC STOCK WC 2 MANUFACTURER: MAHARAM STYLE: SLEEK 398040 COLOR: HONEYSUCKLE 002 SIZE: 53" WIDE CONTACT: BRIAN BUCKLEY (312) 339.5839 Job No: 05CEC0.0193.000"=e NOTE: PROVIDE (3) THREE ADDITIONAL DOUBLE ROLLS FOR ATTIC STOCK y 3Op,5m, J �(6-�q p — J a -di, ® y �,�� 6 {(517; [Wii l:� 4..e :i L.,Vl 6 Y y;ai Os -s Title: SC ® 11_�<� I `-- e MANUFACTURER: GUILFORD OF MAINE STYLE: CAPE COD 3073 COLOR: SURF 7062 SIZE: 66" USABLE NOTE: RAILROAD INSTALLATION FABRIC BRUCE CLIPP (616) 450-6235 Sheet: a _ u^i 0 0 N DOOR SCHEDULE NO. ROOM NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS DOOR HARDWARE GROUP TYPE CORE MATERIAL FINISH TYPE FRAME MATERIAL FINISH OPENING FIRE RATING DOOR REMARKS Count 101A OPEN AREA 31-011 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101B OPEN AREA 31-01, 8'- 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101C OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-011 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101D OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101E OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101F OPEN AREA 31-011 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 101G OPEN AREA 31-011 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 102A STORAGE 3' - 0" 81-011 13/4" (none) F 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 104A COMPUTER LAB 3' - 0" 81-011 13/4" (none) F THUMBTURN - EZ TURN -L583363 RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 105A (E) RECORDING STUDIO 31-01, 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 106A COMPUTER LAB 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 13/4" (none) F MOCKET METALLIC SILVER CH2 HEIGHT=5'-6"A.F.F RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 106B COMPUTER LAB 2' -10" 71- 7" 13/4" - EXT S2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 108A COMPUTER LAB 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" (none) F SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES -MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 110A SERVER ROOM 31-011 81-011 13/4" (none) F US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 2 SET DOOR SILENCERS RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 111A BOOK ROOM 31-011 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 112A COMPUTER LAB 21- 6" 81-011 13/4" (none) F US26D BB1279 - 4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 113A BOOK ROOM 31-011 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A L9080 STOREROOM FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES RE -LOCATED DOOR AND HARDWARE WHERE APPLICABLE 1 116A I COMPUTER LAB 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 200A OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 200B OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 200C OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 200D OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 200E COMPUTER LAB 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 20OF FASHION LAB 3' - 0" 81-011 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 20OG OPEN AREA 31-011 81-011 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 N*7777 OPEN AREA 3' - 0" 81-01, 13/4" EXT F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A EXISTING TO REMAIN 1 DOOR & HARDWARE NOTES CARD READER - ACCESS CONTROL 1. ALL (E) DOORS REQUIRING HARDWARE UPDATE/MODIFICATION: REPLACE DOOR AS REQUIRED TO 1. XXX MATCH (E) WITH NEWLY PREPARED DOORS AS SCHEDULED FOR NEW WORK. G.C. TO BE RESPONSIBLE TO MAINTAIN (E) UL -RATING OF DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLY AT RATED LOCATIONSI / AN -1.0 2. SEE DETAIL ( ) FOR TYPICAL DOOR CLEARANCES. 3. ALL 20 MIN. UL RATED DOORS AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES TO HAVE S -LABEL. 4. ALL RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE U.L. AND NFPA APPROVED. 5. ALL DOORS AND FRAMES TO BE INSTALLED PLUMB, STRAIGHT AND TRUE. MAINTAIN ADEQUATE TOLERANCES AND CLEARANCES SO THAT ALL DOORS FIT AS SPECIFIED AND SWING/SLIDE PROPERLY. ANY DEVIATION FROM THIS WILL BE REJECTED BY OWNER AS UNACCEPTABLE AND WILL BE REPLACED AT SUPPLIER'S AND INSTALLER'S SOLE COST. 6. PROVIDE ALL PARTS NECESSARY FOR PROPER OPERATION OF ALL DOORS. DOOR TYPES 7. MAXIMUM DOOR OPENING EFFORT OF 5 LBS. AT INTERIOR DOORS AND EXTERIOR DOORS, 15 LBS. AT FIRE RATED DOORS. 8. ALL DOORS IN THE REQUIRED PATH OF EGRESS EQUIPPED WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DEVICES SHALL HAVE THESE DEVICES RELEASE IN THE EVENT OF A FIRE ALARM ACTIVATION 9. ALL DOORS ARE EQUIPPED WITH SINGLE -EFFORT, NON -GRASP HARDWARE (I.E., LEVER OR LOOP) CENTERED BETWEEN 34" AND 44" ABOVE THE FLOOR. 10. ALL DOORS MUST BE OPERABLE FROM THE INSIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF KEY, SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE , OR EFFORT. 11. ALL GLAZING AND SIDELITES TO BE CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS, U.O.N. 12. ALL KEYED LOCKETS TO BE SUPPLIED WITH BUILDING STANDARD CYLINDER. TYPE F TYPE FG TYPE H 13. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 14. FIRE RATED DOORS AND FRAMES TO HAVE APPROVED FIRE RETARDANT BACKING. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CERTIFICATION OF FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT TO THE FIRE MARSHAL. 15. DOOR HEIGHTS GIVEN IN THE DOOR SCHEDULE DO NOT INCLUDE THE DOOR FRAME. 16. ADD DO NOT UNDERCUT UL RATED DOORS, PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE THRESHOLD OR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 17. SEE AN -SERIES SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 18. CONTRACTOR TO PREP ALL DOORS AND FRAMES TO RECEIVE ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE AS REQUIRED FOR CARD READERS, INCLUDING RUNNING CABLING, PROVIDING A RACEWAY FROM ELECTRIFIED HINGE TO POWER TRANSFER. AND PROVIDING ALL HARDWARE INCLUDING ELECTRIFIED HINGES. CARD READER DEVICES ARE PROVIDED AND TERMINATED BY TENANT. ALL CARD READER DEVICES ARE FAIL-SAFE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED IN THE DOOR SCHEDULE. ALL DOORS SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE CARD READERS ARE FOR ROOM ACCESS ONLY AND PROVIDE FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES. CARD KEY ACCESS IS NEVER REQUIRED TO EXIT/EGRESS OUT OF ANY AREA OF THE BUILDING. ADDITIONAL NOTES 1. COORDINATE KEYING WITH BUILDING STANDARD MASTER KEYING SYSTEM AND WITH CLIENT. 2. ALL DOORS AND FRAMES SCHEDULED TO BE PAINTED SHALL MATCH THE ADJACENT WALL WITH SEMI -GLOSS FINISH. 3 GC SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ELECTRIC LOCKS - COORDINATE WITH SECURITY DRAWING AND SECURITY VENDOR. 5. ADJUST DOOR IN FRAME AS REQUIRED FOR PROPER OPERATION AND SEAL. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 6. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL KEYED CYLINDERS AND KEYS. REFER TO KEY SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 7. ELECTRICAL CLOSETS, RISER CLOSETS, COMPRESSOR ROOM AND EQUIPMENT ROOMS TO RECEIVE KNURLED LEVER HANDLES. 8. DOORS TO BE BOOK MATCHED VENEERS. STAIN FINISH TO MATCH ARCHITECT'S SAMPLE. PROVIDE SAMPLE TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL. STAIN TO MATCH PL -8. STAIN FINISH TO BE VERIFIED WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SAMPLE COMPLETION AND FINAL BID SUBMISSION. 9 ALL PERMETER AND CARD READER DOORS ARE TO RECEIVE "PRIMUS" CYLINDERS. PRIMUS CYLINDERS ARE TO BE PURCHASED THROUGH CEC PREFERRED VENDOR. VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION TO BE OBTAINED FROM CEC SECURITY CONTACT. ITiTI .911 11 11111111 ■ HARDWARE GROUP QUANTITY HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER FINISH SIZEISTYLE REMARKS OO DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: EXISTING DOOR MASTER KEY FOR ALL CLASSROOMS / LABS CLASSROOM EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO REMAIN. PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM OFFICE 2 PER ROOM SECURE DOOR IN CLOSED POSITION. REPLACE EXISTING LOCKSET WITH KEY CYLINDER ON INTERIOR AND KEY CYLINDER ON EXTERIOR OF DOOR. ADJUST EXISTING DOOR AS REQUIRED. 01 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR - PASSAGE &or ow— PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM 11/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BBI 279-4.5x4.5 1 LEVER PASSAGE SET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9010 PASSAGE FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 02 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR WITH CARD READER - FAIL SAFE 11/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279-4,5x4.5 1 ELECTRIC TRANSFER HINGE - FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279ETW- 4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET- ELECTRIC SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES -MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080EL-RX ELECTRONICALLY LOCKED FAIL SAFE PROVIDE LOCK BODY THAT CAN BE MODIFIED TO FAIL SAFE IN FIELD. 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER LCN US26D 4041 SERIES - SUPER SMOOTHES INSTALL ON INTER OR SIDE OF DOOR - YLINDER, POWDER COAT METAL COVER 1 CARD READER _ _ _ SECURITY VENDOR TO DETERMINE -COORDINATE WITH BUILDING ALARM SYSTEM - REFER TO SECURITY DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 03 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: RESTROOM WITH CLOSER 11/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D B81279 -4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER -"06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9040 PNVACY FUNCTION THUMBTURN - EZ TURN -L583363 1 CLOSER LCN US26D 4041 SERIES - SUPER SMOOTHES INS IALL UN IN I hKIQK SIDE OF DOOR - DELAYED ACTIUN GYUNUFK, POWDER COAT METAL COVER 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 COAT HOOK MOCKET METALLIC SILVER CH2 HEIGHT=5'-6"A.F.F SIGNAGE BY SIGNAGE VENDOR 04 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: DOUBLE DOOR WITH CARD READER - FAIL SAFE 21/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279.4.5x4.5 1 ELECTRIC TRANSFER HINGE - FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279ETW- 4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET- ELECTRIC SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES -MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080EL-RX ELECTRONICALLY LOCKED FAIL SAFE 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 2 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER LCN US26D 4041 SERIES -SUPER SMOOTHES COVER 1 CARD READER_ _ — SECURITY VENDOR TO DETERMINE - COORDINATE WITH BUILDING ALARM SYSTEM - REFER TO SECURITY DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 05 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR -LOCKING -STOREROOM 11/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279 - 4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080 STOREROOM FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER WITH HOLD OPEN LCN US26D 4041 SERIES - SUPER SMOOTHEE INSTALL ON INTERIOR SIDE OF DOOR - DELAYED ACTION CYLINDER, POWDER COAT METAL COVER WITH HOLD OPEN 06 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: DOUBLE DOOR -LOCKING -STOREROOM 21/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D 881279 -4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080 STOREROOM FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 2 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER WITH HOLD OPEN LCN US26D 4041 SERIES -SUPER SMOOTHEE INSTALL ON INTERIOR SIDE OF DOOR - DELAYED ACTION CYLINDER, POWDER COAT METAL COVER WITH HOLD OPEN 07 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR - PASSAGE 1 1/2PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D 861279 -4.5x4.5 1 LEVER PASSAGE SET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER -"06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9010 PASSAGE FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 COATHOOK MOCKET MHALLIC SILVER CH2 HEIGHT=5-6"A.F.F 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 08 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR - LEAD LINED 1 PR LEAD -LINED PIVOT HINGE - HEAVY DUTY RIXON L147 1 LEAD -LINED FULL MORTISE - HEAVY DUTY RIXON ML19 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L"SERIES- MORTISE LEVER -"06"WITH "B"WROUGHT ROSE L9050 OFFICE FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER W/ HOLD OPEN LCN US26D 4041 SERIES - SUPER SMOOTHEE INSTALL ON INTERIOR SIDE OF DOOR - DELAYED ACTION CYLINDER, POWDER COAT METAL COVER W/ HOLD OPEN 09 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR -CLASSROOM WITH CLOSERS 11/2PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279 - 4.5x4.5 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER -"06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080 STOREROOM FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 CLOSER W/ HOLD OPEN LCN US26D 4041 SERIES -SUPER SMOOTHEE INSTALL ON INTERIOR SIDE OF DOOR - DELAYED ACTION CYLINDER, POWDER COAT METAL COVER W/ HOLD OPEN 10 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE DOOR - LOCKING -WELLNESS ROOM 11/2 PR HINGE -FULL MORTISE HAGER US26D BB1279.4.5x4.5 1 LEVER PASSAGE SET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER - "06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE _ L9010 PASSAGE FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT 1 SET DOOR SILENCERS HAGER GREY 307D 1 OCCUPANCY INDICATOR HAGER US26D 3216 STAINLESS STEEL EXPOSED TRIM 11 DOOR ROOM DESCRIPTION: SINGLE ACOUSTICAL DOOR - CLASSROOM 1 1/2PR CAM LIFT 900# CAPACITY HINGES - PROVIDED WITH DOOR AND FRAME BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 1 LEVER LOCKSET SCHLAGE 626 "L" SERIES - MORTISE LEVER -"06" WITH "B" WROUGHT ROSE L9080 STOREROOM FUNCTION 1 FLOOR STOP IVES US26D FS436 COORDINATE WITH DOOR UNDERCUT AND DOOR RISE DO TO CAM LIFT HINGES HARDWARE QUANTITY HARDWARE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER FINISH SIZE/STYLE REMARKS GROUP 3 MASTER KEY FOR ALL CLASSROOMS / LABS CLASSROOM 2 PER ROOM PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM OFFICE KEY SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION KEY QUANTITY REMARKS GRAND MASTER 3 ONE KEY TO BE PROVIDED TO BUILDING MANAGEMENT CLASSROOM - SUB -MASTER 3 MASTER KEY FOR ALL CLASSROOMS / LABS CLASSROOM 2 PER ROOM PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM OFFICE 2 PER ROOM PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM U SUPPORT ROOMS 2 PER ROOM &or ow— PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM IDF/SERVER 2 PER ROOM PROVIDE INDIVIDUAL CYLINDERS PER ROOM NOTES 1, GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE KEYING SCHEDULE BASED ON CRITERIA ABOVE. SUBMIT SCHEDULE TO CEC FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL. CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER 9400 REGISTERED A HITECT y. Y . MILLER LS ,TE O WASHINGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE R IOR ARCH IT ECTS S E A T T L E 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 ,� R ,��— �, „Scale:, 1"4 Ar_7`RC7' !F_Ma 5 2=015 r 3lcy E'i•''• T avg .I .J4 t .g a. Title: D O ® S D Sheet :EDUCATION C 0:P -P: 0 RA T I 0 N r�" vnx i.. �7'an rd............ . .... .......... -... . .............. ................ ... . ..... . .... C C S13 SEATTLE CONSOLIDATION 11 10 9 8 7 6 (::4(::3 2 1 144'-71 /2" 15'-11" 16'-6" 15'-6" 321- " 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 13'-21/2" BUILDIN 7 I I I I I I I I I 645 ANDOVER ST TUKWILA,96188 0 — I I I I I I I 014 9400 IGISTERED CHITECT Y ILLER I I I I A E WASHINGTON xx 012 I N r N 00 co I I I'LL I 013 I I I I I ti 001 001 I I I —F - - - - - - F - - - - -nnlr / 111111 \ I I \ II � II M II I II I I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I o I I I I E - - - - - - - - - - - N.I.C.- - - n 01DEMOLITION PLAN 1 /8" = 1'-O" 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR. /--A ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E DEMOLITION LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES NO. DESCRIPTION li \ 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 19. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BARRIER BETWEEN ADJACENT TENANT SPACE AND AREA OF WORK, WHERE REQUIRED. EXITING FROM 001 SALVAGE AND REUSE. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE DEMOLISHED 2. ALL EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROTECT EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN. BUILDING TO BE MAINTAINED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 20. ALL POWER AND DATA IN TENANT SPACE TO BE REMOVED, U.N.O. ANY ADDITIONAL POWER AND DATA LOCATIONS NOT SHOWN 1001 4TH AVENUE SUITE 3600 011 REMOVE THE CARPET ON DRAWING IS TO BE REMOVED. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ON SITE EXTENT OF POWER AND DATA TO BE REMOVED PRIOR TO BID. 012 REMOVE FLOORING MATERIAL FOR NEW CLASSROOM AND OPEN OFFICE 3. GC TO VERIFY WITH BUILDING LANDLORD AND TENANT REPRESENTATIVE, ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED AND THE LOCATIONS FOR STORAGEE PULL ALL DEMOLISHED POWER BACK TO SOURCE. SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 013 REMOVE EXTENT OF FLOOR FINISH OF SALVAGED ITEMS. THIS MAY INCLUDE DOORS, DOOR HARDWARE, SHELVING, EXIT SIGNS, FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES, CARD READERS, 21. PREP ALL EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMS TO REMAIL FOR NEW FINISH, REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE ON CONSTRUCTION SET FOR TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 014 NEED TO REMOVE FLOORING IN THE AREA FOR EXPANSION OF BOOK ROOM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN ETC. FINISH INFO. 22. REMOVE ALL EXISTING WINDOW FILM ON PERIMETER WINDOW GLAZING. EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION TO REMAIN 4. WHERE DEMOLITION OCCURS, ALL PARTITIONS TO BE PATCHED AND PREPPED FOR NEW FINISHES INCLUDING ALL BASE BUILDING WALLS. 5. ALL EXISTING TENANT POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IS TO BE REMOVED ON ALL WALLS INCLUDING BASE BUILDING CORE WALLS © 2016 1 N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. r — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — AND AT PERIMETER WALLS. AT ALL AREAS WHERE ELEC/TELE/DATA ARE REMOVED, POWER TO BE CUT AND ALL CABLING AND CONDUIT TO BE PULLED BACK TO SOURCE. PATCH AND PREP WALLS TO RECEIVE NEW SCHEDULED FINISHES. NO BLANK COVER PLATES WILL BE ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHrrECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT I EXISTING MILLWORK TO BE DEMOLISHED ACCEPTED. ALL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. CEC'S LOW VOLTAGE VENDOR TO REMOVE BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING ONLY. EXISTING ELECTRICAUTELEPHONEJDATA IS NOT SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING. BIDDERS TO SURVEY CONDITION PRIOR TO BID. AREA N.I.C. 6. ALL LIFE SAFETY TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL FOR DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. 7. GC TO VERIFY ALL WALLS BEING REMOVED ARE NON -LOAD BEARING AND NON -FIRE RATED. NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING IMMEDIATELY 8. GC TO VERIFY ALL WALLS BEING REMOVED ARE NON -LOAD BEARING, NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING, IMMEDIATELY IF THERE ARE ANY Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: DISCREPANCIES, NO LOAD BEARING WALLS ARE TO BE REMOVED. 9. REMOVE EXISTING FLOORING THROUGHOUT AREA OF WORK U.O.N. PREP FLOOR TO RECEIVE NEW FLOOR FINISHES. FLOOR SLAB TO BE AM Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 FLUSHED AND SMOOTH FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW FINISHES. PROVIDE FLOOR PREP AS NEEDED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION OF VCT AND CARPET FLOORING TO PREVENT IMPERFECTION TELEGRAPHING THROUGH THE MATERIAL. TOLERANCE IS TO BE 1/2" PER 10'-0".+ s A 10. ALL EXISTING WALL BASE TO BE REMOVED THROUGHOUT U.O.N PATH, REPAIR, AND PREP WALLS FOR NEW BASE. 11. REMOVE ALL MILLWORK IN TENANT SPACE. 12. REMOVE ALL TENANT PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ALL ASSOCIATED PLUMBING BACK TO SOURCE AND CAP. n �l P=�,I 25 13. CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT ALL WINDOW BLINDS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION COMMENCING AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DAMAGED 1 c: 'u WINDOW BLINDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT THE WINDOW BLINDS THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION AND BE RESPONSIBLE TO ? E REMOVE ANY WINDOW BLINDS THAT ARE DAMAGED DUE TO CONSTRUCTIONAND REPLACE WITH NEW TO MATCH BUILDING 9 STANDARD. 14. ALL DAMAGED WALLS THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIL ARE TO BE PATHCE AND PREPPED FOR LIKE NEW CONDITION TO RECEIVE NEW SCHEDULED FINISH. RECEIVED �; r —, a ,aag� a s, az � I ,-., I S C E s : I 1 l HU It ® LITI C 15. IN TEH EVENT OF A DISCPRANCY IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, GC TO PROVIDE THE MORE COSTLY OPTION OF THE DISCREPANCY, NOTIFY CITY OF TUKWILA rltle: _ =s �+ ANNOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ARCHITECT, IN WRITING, FOR FURTHER DIRECTION 16. FURNITURE VENDOR TO REMOVE ALL FURNITURE SHOWN AS DEMOLITION. GC TO COORDINATE IN ADVANCE OF EACH PHASE WITH FURNITURE VENDOR AND TENANT TO ALLOW FOR PROPER TIME TO REMOVE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT. FEB 0 9 2016 1 A D - DENOTES DEMOLITION E - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN 17. REFER TO MEP DRAWING FOR EXTENT OF MEP DEMOLITION 18. REFER TO ENGEERING AND VENDOR'S DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN PERMIT CENTER Sheet: 0 %J WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO WORK. 01 DEMO RCP 1/8'1 = 1'-0" FIXTURE SCHEDULE RCP LEGEND TYP. CEILING GRID AND LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE REMOVED RECESSED PROJECTION SCREEN TO BE RELOCATED PROJECTOR SCREEN NEW LOCATION SHEET NOTES 1. SEE SHEET AN -0.0 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. ALL CEILINGS TO REMAIN. REMOVE ANY DAMAGED CEILING TILE AND REPLACE WITH NEW. 3. ALL EXIT LIGHTING TO REMAIN. 4. SALVAGE ALL LIGHT FIXTURE FOR REUSE IN THIS PROJECT. 5. SEE ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING REMOVAL OF MEP DEVICES. KEY NOTES NO. DESCRIPTION 001 SALVAGE AND REUSE. 002 RELOCATE PROJECTOR AND PROJECTION SCREEN FOR REUSE. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH CEO IT AND SCHOOL 010 VERIFY NUMBER & LOCATION OF EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES 301 REWORK EXISTING CEILING GRID TO ACCOMODATE EXTENDING SERVER ROOM WALLS TO DECK. u� %- I REGISTERED MILLER 'HINGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE RI OR ARCHITECTS S EATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 C� PROJECTOR © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL QO EXISTING SECURITY CAMERA AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. D - DENOTES DEMOLITION E - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN R - DENOTES RELOCATED AREA N.I.C. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Tille: PLAN REVIEf�0 '0R Si ,a yFy qua FK.axu �.F.� i ARE E 77-tDUCATION 6 C 0:P_ P 0: RA T I 0 N' ........._................ _ .. ... ': ctrl OC' 'C,) < '^i <, . ........... . .......... ....................... .. . ............ ......... . CC SEA TTLE 11 10 9 8 07144'_7,/2" 6 5 4 3 2 1 CONSOLIDATION 15'-11" 16'-6" 15'-6" 321-1011 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 13'-21/2" 1 3'-0" I I I I I I I I BUILDING 7 FYI 64'5 ANDOVER v CO3 CO3 B- - - T CO3CO3 7:-zr� co3 9400 REGISTERED I A TECT LECTURE 0 I FACULTY BOOK LIBRARY CLASSROOM O 107 AREA ROOM 109 111 113 B. MILLER 103 105 S OF ASHINGTON CO3 I N.I.C. I I I I N r 00 M I 23'-4" I ( 1 17'-1" I EXTERIOR COURTYARD F 101G 101E 101E I I IIIA 9 1 OPEN Boa AREA A-6.0 ALIGN 102 ALIGN 101 101D ALIG co3 C— — I -- -----� e Al N CO3 _F' — — — — — — F — — 102A I 1110A m SERVER 101A 101B 101C STORAGE 02 I i I ROOOM 1603 5'-8" I I I I B03 1-7 co3 RECEPT ld O — — — 13'-9" CO3 101 '1 100 ::..__.... ::::::::::.... 04Aco3 CO3 108A o I 19'-9° r 106A M 103 C -,i COMPUTER COMPUTER I COMPUTER I COMPUTER I COMPUTER COMPUTER I N LAB 104 CO3 LAB 1 106 1 CO3 LAB CO3 LAB LAB 1 108 1 1 112 1 1114 LAB 116 116A I I 161-7" 1 L 16-11 " I I I I I L. o I 3 I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 01 PARTITION PLAN 1/811= 1'-0" 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date PARTITION SCHEDULE PARTITION LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES STUD PARTITION TYPE (SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE) 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. NO. DESCRIPTION 101 ADD BLOCKING FOR SIGNAGE. SPACING MAX DETAIL INSULATION TYPE, WHERE OCCURS (SEE INSULATION TYPES) 2. PARTITIONS DIMENSIONED TO FINISH FACE U.O.N. DO NOT ADJUST DIMENSIONS INDICATED AS "CLEAR" WITHOUT WRITTEN 102 EXTEND EXISTING WALL TO DECK. TYPE FIRE RATING UL # DESCRIPTION SSMA # (IN) DEFLECTION MAX HT STC THICKNESS REF. DIRECTION FROM ARCHITECT. DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING AS BUILT FIELD KEYNOTE CONDITIONS, INCLUDING FIELD MEASUREMENTS PRIOR TO START OF WORK, NOTIFY ARCHITECT WHERE DISCREPANCIES OCCUR. 103 NO WORK TO BE DONE IN THIS ROOM. B 1 ti 202 GLAZING TYPE 3. USE TYPE "X" GWB ON FIRE RATED PARTITIONS. 4. USE CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD ('DUROCK') OR EQUAL AT PARTITIONS SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE CERAMIC TILE (U.O.N.). SEE B03 NR NR NON -RATED 3 5/8" METAL STUDS, FULL HEIGHT 3625125-33 16 0240 17'- 5" 40 4 7/8" o FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATION OF TILE. [SLAB -TO -SLAB] WITH ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPBOARD EACH SIDE. NEW CONSTRUCTION FLOOR TO CEILING WINDOW 5. SEE A-8 DETAIL SHEET SERIES FOR TYPICAL PARTITION DETAILS, EXTEND OF FRAMING AND FINISHES. 77. FRE SAFE PENETRATIONSWHERE FURRED FIRE RESISTANTCEED R TED PARTMUM HEIGHT, ITIONS PER APPLICABLE ULACE TO ADJACENT TASSEMBLY. SURE. SEE A-8 DE AB SHEET SERIEETAIL SHEET S FOR I TI I CO3 NR NR 3 5/8" METAL STUDS WITH ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPBOARD EACH 362S125-33 16 U240 17' - 5�� 40 4 7/8" SIDE PARTITION TERMINATES 6" ABOVE CEILING). ( ) PARTIAL HEIGHT WINDOW (WITH SILL) DOOR TAG (DOOR NUMBER BASED ON ROOM DETAILS. 8. MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF EXISTING FIRE RESISTANT RATED ASSEMBLIES FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. 9• PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED AT LOCATIONS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: GRAB BARS, SHELVING, OVERHEAD CABINETS, 2016 NUMBER WITH ALPHA SUFFIX IF MULTIPLE) SIGNAGE, TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES, WALL MOUNT. EQUIPMENT, ETC. 10. REFER TO A-2 SHEET SERIES FOR POWER & SIGNAL DEVICE LOCATIONS. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN 11. PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH U.O.N. PROVIDE LEVEL 5 FINISH AT ALL PARTITIONS TO RECEIVE WALL COVERING. REFER TO FINISH PLANS NEW 1 H FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION FOR LOCATIONS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 12. LARGE SCALE DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SMALL SCALE DRAWINGS. DETAILS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVERALL, NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING WHERE DISCREPANCIES OCCUR. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA 13. ALL EXPOSED OUTSIDE GYPSUM CORNERS SHALL HAVE AMETAL CORNER BEAD. FEB O 9 2016 NEW 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION 14. DIMENSIONS TAKEN FROM P R METERDEXTER OR WINDOW WALL ROE TAKEN FROM THE INSIDE FACE OF THE VERTICAL MULLION. DIMENSIONS MARKED VERIFY IN FIELD, SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO START OF WORK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK Owner Approval: EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION 15. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH HVAC, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, DESIGN BUILD FIRE PROTECTION AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND REPORT TO THE ARCHITECT DISCREPANCIES FOR CORRECTION AND ADJUSTMENT PRIOR TO PERMIT CENTER - EXISTING 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION START OF WORK. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR INCREASED COST DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S LACK OF COORDINATION. 16. PATCH FLOOR AND WALL AREAS DAMAGED DUE TO NEW CONSTRUCTION OR WHERE PENETRATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE FOR �. 5i31�Scale a s �8 •. 1-0 Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 ,' " INSULATION TYPES MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. FIRESAFE AT UL RATED ASSEMBLIES CONSISTENT WITH EXISTING UL RATING. h0 D E Cp;E.4A3*l, 17. WHERE EXISTING RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE SHOWN, CONTRACTOR IS REQUESTED TO FIELD VERIFY AS BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS TO EXISTING MILLWORK WITH OVERHEAD CABINETS CONFIRM RATINGS SHOWN. IF NON-COMPLIANT CONDITIONS ARE FOUND, DEMO AND REPLACE WITH NEW EQUIVALENT UL ASSEMBLY, OR REPORT FINDINGS TO OWNER/ARCHITECT IN WRITING WHO WILL PROVIDE WRITTEN DIRECTION. TYPE: MINERAL WOOL INSULATION FIBERGLASS BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 2 - °' 0 `� 18. PATCH AND REPAIR ALL EXISTING PARTITIONS AFTER DEMOLITION WHERE DAMAGE HAS OCCURRED AT UNPROTECTED t NEW MILLWORK WITH OVERHEAD CABINETS LOCATIONS. PLEASE NOTE THAT DEMOLITION ACTIVITY MAY OCCUR BEYOND WORK LIMITS SHOWN ON DEMOLITION PLAN DUE TO A 11/2" K 11/2" CONCEALED CONDITIONS.. AREA N.I.C. 19. ALL EXISTING FIRE RATINGS NEED TO BE MAINTAINED. IF DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR FINDS ANY RATINGS COMPROMISED HE MUST INCLUDE REPAIRS AS PART OF HIS SCOPE. C p 21/2" M 21/2"0,0j 31/2" N 31/2" XISTING INSULATION TO REMAIN (ANY TYPE) P 61/4" n )- AN A TITI O' F 611 Title: FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET G MINERAL WOOL THERMAL INSULATION FIBERGLASS BATT THERMAL INSULATION 21/2" (R-8) R 21/2" (R-8) FIRE PROTECTION RISER CABINET H 31/2" (R-9) S 31/2" (R-11) FPR 1 +42" - INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. 1 61/4" (R-18) T 61/4" (R-19) Sheet:1A no CARIFER E�: DUCATION C OR P O R A T I O N ...�►an .......... . Odd row...n.. .... ...... .... ......... .......... ...... .. ...... ....... ..... (11__ n10 9 8 76 5 4 3 2 1 CCS SEATTLE 144-71/2 CONSOLIDATION 15'-11" 16'-6" 15'-6" 32-1)" 16'-6" 151-6" 16'-6" 13-21/2" 3'-0" I I I I I I I I I I BUILDING 7 A 645 ANDOVER Cp _WEST L=j EXj ; I I TUKWILA, WA 96166 I k7J 0 A 9400 REGISTERED 105 -- - ---- �' Y__t - - -- ARCHITECT PF N.I.C. S ? , r% __ , i BOOK 103 .—__w ROOM I I . MILLER S A OF ASHINGTON N N -- -- - - ---- -.— — 111 FACULTY IL_ VAP F I E LIBRARY CLG AREA M 109 36--- m LECTURE ! w CLASSROOM �, w ,X11 107 ® EX 1 TSA, JCR Q— E�- EO C I F CR E X EX EX F =-L__ -� -- F� IJEi - �— - e EX...--- ----� �- - — - - -- CR ,---- 207 208 ❑ L._ .............. .......... ............................. STORAGE 102 _ I RECEPTION- --- J SERVER 209 210 R� -- 110 � a, I I COMPUTER I LAB 104 I COMPUTER J COMPUTER =} LAB LAB a LAg I CLG _ COMPIITER �' I i w LA � i I 112 �� 114 ] ��,— COMPUTER I i O° D I 116 Dili, 3 1 49 co �* 202 COMPUTER LAB202 co �V� 108 1 J = �0 "Q 5 'Q I -�14; �} J LIS 41 El Q --------------- - Jull [F4 1114 D - �9 6 6 6 D _ •---PV WALL V VALL. N LL LL ®.P®A® W71%, I I I I I I I I I I n 01 POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR. ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE POWER & SIGNAL LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES d WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET FV-] FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. SEE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. NO. DESCRIPTION 201 PROVIDE POWER AND DATA ON WIREMOLD MOUNTED UNDER DESK. 202 SEE RCP FOR PROJECTION SCREEN AND PROJECTOR LOCATION. d WALL MOUNTED DEDICATED OUTLET 0 FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET D 3. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL FINAL FLOOR CORE LOCATIONS WITH FURNITURE VENDOR, OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 4. G.C. TO MAINTAIN EXISTING UL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 207 COORDINATE CABLE RUN AND FLOOR SLEEVE LOCATION BETWEEN SERVER ROOM 233 WITH IDF CLOSET, 111, 305, 415, AND WALL MOUNTED QUAD OUTLET FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DATA OUTLET 5. ALL NEW COVER PLATES, STROBES, SWITCHES, AND PLUGS, ETC. TO BE WHITE AT PAINTED AND FABRIC WALL AREAS U.O.N. ALL COVER PLATES AT WOOD VENEER WALLS TO BE DARK BROWN U.O.N. REPLACE EXISTING COVER PLATES, PLUGS, SWITCHES, ETC. WITH NEW. 520 WITH CEC IT. CABLE TO BE INSTALLED BY CEC IT VENDORSEATTLE , WASHINGTON 98154 208 COORDINATE POWER/DATA LOCATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS WITH CEC IT IN THIS ROOM. WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET JB � SUBMIT COLOR SELECTION TO ARCHITECT PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 6. WHERE DEVICES ARE SHOWN BACK TO BACK, OFFSET AS REQUIRED TO COMPENSATE FOR BOX AND STUD DIMENSIONS. USE CENTER POINT TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 209 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX FOR SECURITY PANEL. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH SECURITY DRAWINGS 210 PROVIDE GROUND BAR AND GROUNDING STRIPS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS FOR STATIC DISSIPATIVE TILE. REFER BETWEEN DEVICE LOCATIONS AS REFERENCE POINT FOR LOCATION DIMENSION U.O.N. ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET WALL MOUNTED DATA OUTLET 7. COORDINATE DEVICE LOCATIONS PRIOR TO START OF WORK INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SYSTEM TO ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS AND FINISH FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. FURNITURE LAYOUT, FREE STANDING AND BUILT-IN FURNITURE, MILLWORK, STRUCTURAL COLUMN LINES AT'POKE-THROUGH' LOCATIONS D FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED WIRED JUNCTION BOX WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET & FACE OF FINISH AT PARTITIONS AND FLOOR. WHERE APPLICABLE CONDUCT PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 8. WHERE'WHIPS' ARE SCHEDULED FOR SYSTEM FURNITURE, PROVIDE COMPLETE CODE COMPLIANT INSTALLATION INCLUDING, BUT NOT ©2016 1 N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL ® FLOOR MOUNTED QUAD OUTLET � WALL MOUNTED CARD READER LIMITED TO'WHIP' MUST BE VISIBLE AND READILY ACCESSIBLE, SYSTEM FURNITURE'WHIP' INSTALLATION, HOOK UP AND ACTIVATION SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL LABOR LAWS AND JURISDICTION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING UL., LOCATE 'WHIP' OUTSIDE CLEAR ZONES REQUIRED AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. FOR CIRCULATION, ADA ACCESSIBLE ROUTES AND EXIT PATH. FURNITURE MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET WALL MOUNTED PUSH BUTTON 9. MEP TO BE DESIGN BUILD. OUTKETS TO BE ADDED PER CODE REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO OWNER'S REQUESTED OUTLETS ABOVE. FURNITURE MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET ❑ WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT TSAT AV AV FLOOR MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX WALL � WALL WHIP - DATA/POWER 22 22 ��# OFTEUDATA & POWER DROPS' 0 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION SLK F Drawn: AS LMJ �Oheck' D '1_0a'_" Owner Approval: �nJBs FLR FL7 2 2 FLOOR WHIP - DATA/POWER 2 2- Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Scale: 1/8" = 1'-0" h Al 2 5 '20166 _# OF TEUDATA & POWER DROPS AREA NOT IN CONTRACT ® FLOOR MONUMENT- POWER f' ® CONNECTOR ANNOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONSRECEIVEDPOWER OE AND SIC71 AL FURNISH: SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO PROJECT SITE READY FOR UNLOADING, UNPACKING & INSTALLATION. CITY OF TU KWILA INSTALL: OPERATIONS ON PROJECT SITE INCL. UNLOADING, TEMP. STORING, UNPACKING, INSTALLING, ASSEMBLING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, FINISHING, PROTECTING, CLEANING ETC. FEB O 9 2016 Title: PLAN PROVIDE: FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE READY FOR THE INTENDED USE. D - DENOTES DEMOLITION GFI - DENOTES GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT E - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN 8+42" - INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. PERMIT CENTER R - DENOTES RELOCATED Sheet: E R .:UARE E,,DUCATION C10 RPO RATION ... . ........ .......... ........ .......... . ............ ....... ......... ... .. .......... ...... ....... ... .... I _ ....... .. , _ ...... ... ....... ......._ .. CEC S13 SEATTLE CONSOLIDATION \ \ 144'-71/2" 16'7 7 �.; M. -6" 15'-6" 32'- " 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 13'-21 /2" 3'-0" BUILDING 7 _ 645 ANDOVER EST �Y l 1 1 .V" 41 r \ r, _ rT k F' r: ax l v k;3 ( I I 3 _ ., 5 i TUKWILA, WA 98188 114- 4 r' Z" � l z % r w� 9400 REGISTERED HITECT �r k" I. MILLER •\ li I•: I STA EO WASHINGTON N.I.C. I 302 RO M AREA LIB RAF! 00 co t 302 302 302 � tf} E CLASSROOM E 7 - I � i � ti I,. 1 I .. _. - ROM a I STORAGE RECEPTIO .._..._.. 301 302 1 ...................... �I COMPUTER IE tAB 302 I r02LAB , 3 302 302 LAB LAB COMPUTE I AB LAB I : II I; i jE NJ T 9, m N721- yy 3 LEI 11 it n I A n 01 RCP 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR. ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E FIXTURE SCHEDULE RCP LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES ®� CEILING MOUNTED ONE SIDED EXIT SIGN CEILING MOUNTED SPECIALTY PENDENT O 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. VERIFY AS -BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS FOR EXISTING AND NEW PLUMBING, AUDIO VISUAL, HVAC DUCTWORK AND PIPING, NO. DESCRIPTION 301 REWORK EXISTING CEILING GRID TO ACCOMODATE EXTENDING SERVER ROOM WALLS TO DECK. ]I@[ CEILING MOUNTED TWO SIDED EXIT SIGN STRUCTURAL FRAMING, ELECTRICAL BUS DUCT AND CONDUIT BANKS, ELECTRICAL PULL BOXES, FIRE PROTECTION LINES AND RELATED 302 PROVIDE CEILING MOUNTED MOTION SENSOR FOR LIGHTING CONTROL OF ALL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. FIXTURES IN THIS ROOM.SEE ENGINEER'S 1 001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 R® WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN WORK TO DETERMINE AND COORDINATE BEST CEILING FRAMING, POINTS OF ACCESS AND CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WORK. 3. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS WHERE REQUIRED IN GYP.BD. CEILING INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS, FIRE LIFE SAFETY SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 o LINEAR FLUORESCENT J -BOXES, FAN COILS AND VAV BOXES PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS, CONDUIT BANK PULL BOXES AND CONTROL AND SHUTOF VALVES. TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 0 LINEAR FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER 4. UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN PROVIDE FLUSH DRYWALL TYPE ACCESS PANELS W/ CONCEALED FRAME AT ALL NON RATED LOCATIONS. 2X4 FLUORESCENT TROFFER FIXTURE 5. 6. ALL CEILING MOUNTED ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BEAR UL LABEL AND FREE OF DEFECTS. WHERE EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE IS SCHEDULED TO REMAIN, REPLACE DAMAGED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE WITH NEW TO MATCH EXISTING. IF PRODUCT IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM BUILDING INVENTORY ATTIC STOCK OR MANUFACTURER, NOTIFY ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ® 2X2 FLUORESCENT TROFFER FIXTURE 7. START OF WORK. LIGHTING CONTROL COVER PLATES SHALL BE WHITE AT GYP BD CEILINGS, SOFFITS AND CEILING MOUNTED FABRIC WRAPPED PANEL © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL O RECESSED DOWNLIGHT 8. LOCATIONS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AT EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS IN STEEL BUILDINGS WITH EXPOSED SPRAY FIREPROOFING, PROVIDE PROTECTIVE OVERSPRAY OVER SPRAY AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE THE ARCHIT CD. USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ❑ RECESSED SQUARE DOWNLIGHT FIREPROOFING TO PREVENT DUSTING WHERE PAINT IS SCHEDULED AT EXPOSED STRUCTION PROVIDE PRIMER/SEALER UNDERCOAT PER o> RECESSED WALL WASHER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS. CEILING MOUNTED PENDANT 9. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FIRE SPRINKLER AND FIRE ALARM DEVICE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FOR PERMIT. WHERE APPLICABLE CENTER SPRINKLER HEADS IN CEILING TIME. ALIGN SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, MOTION SENSORS AND RELATED WALL MOUNTED SCONCE CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES WITH LIGHTING FIXTURE CENTERLINES AND CENTER OF CEILING TILE. LOCATE HVAC DIFFUSERS IN GYP BD WALL MOUNTED SINGLE LIGHT SWITCH EXISTING WALL MOUNTED SINGLE LIGHT SWITCH CEILINGS AS SHOW ON ARCHITECTURAL R.C.P. 10. LOCATE EXIT SIGNS VERTICALLY ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR TO INSURE SIGHT LINES ARE NOT BLOCKED BY LIGHT FIXTURES, BEAMS, SOFFITS, DROPPED CEILINGS, DUCTWORK, CONDUIT BANKDS, PIPING AND RELATED OVERHEAD WORK. - �, rT - Drawn: AS LMJ RE SCf�D b �°� � 0 tier Approval: k Job No: 050EG0.0193 000 € Scale: 1/8" = 1'4" E EXISTING TYP. CEILING GRID AND LIGHT FIXTURE I 5 City � C ii J RECESSED PROJECTION SCREENRECEIVE® AREA N.I.C. CITY OF TUKWILA REFLECTED CEILING FEB 0 9 2016 Title: PLAN ANNOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ��PERMIT CENTERE +80 D - DENOTES DEMOLITION I ® INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN K INDICATES USE FOR PROJECTION SCREEN -OPS Sheet: R - DENOTES RELOCATED �3 - INDICATES THREE WAY SWITCH 01 FURNITURE PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" FURNITURE LEGEND Type Mark Description Width Depth Height .c N L — CU Cn N � o a NIC Comments 1 REFRIGERATOR 2 MICROWAVE 3 COFFEE MAKER 10 3/8" 1' - 2" 1' -15/8" 4 PROJECTOR (WXGA, 3LCD, STANDARD LENS) SHEET NOTES 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. XX KEY NOTES NO. DESCRIPTION q RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER - 1 , S`45 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, l§ 98188 ��RNCIHITECT STERED JWR Y 6. MILLER STO WASHINGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE R IOR ARCH IT ECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: AS. LMJ Check: CODE CCz Ti L°E Mr Job No: 05CEC0.0193.000 r, Scale: 1/8" = 1'4' M, NP Sdr:•� � �'�' z ar I LAY' e,:* 2 e-O�z • �:E El 0011 Am, R 5 ,g wj CARE'Ek DUCATION C 0 RP 0 RA T I 0 N y 4 S::: Uy� an ... .'. . :. _. O ...' 101'1.-.. .'. ... ...'. ........ .... .. .......... ....... ...... ...... 11 nn 9 8 n7144'-76 5 4 3 2 1 CEC S SEATTLE 1/2" 15'-11 " 1614" 15'-6" 3241' 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 13'-21/2" 3'-0" ® S O I DA TION BUILDING 7 FYI A1. db ANDOVER 0 u645 B - EJC EX EX EJC EX EX T T EJC EX TAT EX EX EJC E , WA 96166 X w Q STEREDHITECTEJC XSHINGTON EJCMILLERN.I.C. *40`�"�"'� N N EO M UJ EO N.I.C. N C' N m N.I.C. D - 0 E R - N.I.C. n 02 DEMOLITION PLAN 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR. .ARCHITECTS DEMOLITION LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES S E A T T L E 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 19. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BARRIER BETWEEN ADJACENT TENANT SPACE AND AREA OF WORK, WHERE REQUIRED. EXITING FROM EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE DEMOLISHED 2. ALL EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROTECT EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN. BUILDING TO BE MAINTAINED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 20. ALL POWER AND DATA IN TENANT SPACE TO BE REMOVED, U.N.O. ANY ADDITIONAL POWER AND DATA LOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWING IS TO BE REMOVED. CONTRACTOR 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 TO VERIFY ON SITE EXTENT OF POWER AND DATA TO BE REMOVED PRIOR TO BID. 3. GC TO VERIFY WITH BUILDING LANDLORD AND TENANT REPRESENTATIVE, ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED AND THE LOCATIONS FOR STORAGEE PULL ALL DEMOLISHED POWER BACK TO SOURCE. SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN OF SALVAGED ITEMS. THIS MAY INCLUDE DOORS, DOOR HARDWARE, SHELVING, EXIT SIGNS, FIRE PROTECTION DEVICES, CARD READERS, 21. PREP ALL EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMS TO REMAIL FOR NEW FINISH, REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE ON CONSTRUCTION SET FOR ETC. FINISH INFO. TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 22. REMOVE ALL EXISTING WINDOW FILM ON PERIMETER WINDOW GLAZING. EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION TO REMAIN 4. WHERE DEMOLITION OCCURS, ALL PARTITIONS TO BE PATCHED AND PREPPED FOR NEW FINISHES INCLUDING ALL BASE BUILDING - WALLS. 5. ALL EXISTING TENANT POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IS TO BE REMOVED ON ALL WALLS INCLUDING BASE BUILDING CORE WALLS r _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ — EXISTING MILLWORK TO BE DEMOLISHED AND AT PERIMETER WALLS. AT ALL AREAS WHERE ELEC/TELE/DATA ARE REMOVED, POWER TO BE CUT AND ALL CABLING AND CONDUIT TO BE PULLED BACK TO SOURCE. PATCH AND PREP WALLS TO RECEIVE NEW SCHEDULED FINISHES. NO BLANK COVER PLATES WILL BE ©2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT L - ACCEPTED. ALL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. CEC'S LOW VOLTAGE VENDOR TO REMOVE BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING ONLY. EXISTING ELECTRICAL/rELEPHONE/DATA IS NOT SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING. BIDDERS TO SURVEY AREA N.I.C. CONDITION PRIOR TO BID. 6. ALL LIFE SAFETY TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL FOR DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. 7. GC TO VERIFY ALL WALLS BEING REMOVED ARE NON -LOAD BEARING AND NON -FIRE RATED. NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING IMMEDIATELY 8. GC TO VERIFY ALL WALLS BEING REMOVED ARE NON -LOAD BEARING, NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING, IMMEDIATELY IF THERE ARE ANY Drawn: AS, LMJ Check:SLK Owner Approval: � DISCREPANCIES, NO LOAD BEARING WALLS ARE TO BE REMOVED. 9. REMOVE EXISTING FLOORING THROUGHOUT AREA OF WORK U.O.N. PREP FLOOR TO RECEIVE NEW FLOOR FINISHES. FLOOR SLAB TO BE -1 "= � , ilJ 1/8" Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Scale FLUSHED AND SMOOTH FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW FINISHES. PROVIDE FLOOR PREP AS NEEDED FOR PROPER INSTALLATION OF VCT AND CARPET FLOORING TO PREVENT IMPERFECTION TELEGRAPHING THROUGH THE MATERIAL. TOLERANCE IS TO BE 1/2" PER 104". 10. ALL EXISTING WALL BASE TO BE REMOVED THROUGHOUT U.O.N PATH, REPAIR, AND PREP WALLS FOR NEW BASE. 11. REMOVE ALL MILLWORK IN TENANT SPACE. 12. REMOVE ALL TENANT PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ALL ASSOCIATED PLUMBING BACK TO SOURCE AND CAP. r''Z , 13. CONTRACTOR TO INSPECT ALL WINDOW BLINDS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION COMMENCING AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY DAMAGED WINDOW BLINDS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROTECT THE WINDOW BLINDS THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION AND BE RESPONSIBLE TO I REMOVE ANY WINDOW BLINDS THAT ARE DAMAGED DUE TO CONSTRUCTIONAND REPLACE WITH NEW TO MATCH BUILDING.,�Aa STANDARD. RECEIVED rI� 14. ALL DAMAGED WALLS THAT ARE EXISTING TO REMAIL ARE TO BE PATHCE AND PREPPED FOR LIKE NEW CONDITION TO RECEIVE NEW CITY OF TU KWILA [Sul SCHEDULED FINISH. 15. IN TEH EVENT OF A DISCPRANCY IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, GC TO PROVIDE THE MORE COSTLY OPTION OF THE DISCREPANCY, NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IN WRITING, FOR FURTHER DIRECTION FEB 9 2016 Tiiie: D E O LI I ANNOTATIONS AND 0 N S DEFINITIONS 16. FURNITURE VENDOR TO REMOVE ALL FURNITURE SHOWN AS DEMOLITION. GC TO COORDINATE IN ADVANCE OF EACH PHASE WITH D - E - DENOTES DEMOLITION DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN FURNITURE VENDOR AND TENANT TO ALLOW FOR PROPER TIME TO REMOVE FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT.PER1.1- 17. REFER TO MEP DRAWING FOR EXTENT OF MEP DEMOLITION CENTER ff it 8-1 ^A 18. REFER TO ENGEERING AND VENDOR'S DOCUMENTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN Sheet: WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO WORK. 2 iLN O N 02 DEMO RCP 1/8" = 1'-0" I FIXTURE SCHEDULE I RCP LEGEND I SHEET NOTES I KEY NOTES TYP. CEILING GRID AND LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE REMOVED RECESSED PROJECTION SCREEN TO BE RELOCATED PROJECTOR SCREEN NEW LOCATION 1. SEE SHEET AN -0.0 FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. ALL CEILINGS TO REMAIN. REMOVE ANY DAMAGED CEILING TILE AND REPLACE WITH NEW. 3. ALL EXIT LIGHTING TO REMAIN. 4. SALVAGE ALL LIGHT FIXTURE FOR REUSE IN THIS PROJECT. 5. SEE ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING REMOVAL OF MEP DEVICES. 245 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA., 98188 9400 REGISTERED Z;�b AR4-ILTECT RE B. MILLER OF WASHINGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE R IOR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 C� PROJECTOR © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL QO EXISTING SECURITY CAMERA AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. D - DENOTES DEMOLITION E - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN R - DENOTES RELOCATED AREA N.I.C. I RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 REFLECTED Title: PLAN ner HpprRyg,z 2 -u;,-, i i."S8im3 a& s, c'Uj-� 6 CODr- C C? i UA 41C E faced, �2 5 t.J>U N C KY 01 !a? gE+ F '1- 11G_ CAREER E-OUCATION C O R RO RAT S O N _ _ _ _ _ ............ ........ _ _ _ _ ................................................................................................................ _ _ _ _ ................................................................................................................ 0. _..' rd _.. .1"0 11 (11 10 9 8 07144'-76 5 4 3 11 CEC S E 1/2 CONSOLIDATION 15'-11" 16'-6" 15'-6" 32-011 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 13'-21/2" 3'-0" BUILDING 7 A CO3 645 ANDOVER _ 2'-01r mTmoi- C7 CO3 g - W TUKWILA, WA 96166 FASHION LAB 205 .—... 9400 REGISTERED STAFF FASHION CO3 i CT LOUNGE LAB 8 -6.0 201 AFF 203 Y B. MILLER N.I.C. TE WASHING ON N r N EO M ff�F S2 B 207 ti co 200 C an ARM r—rm N.I.C. D 208 N m N.I.C. 202 204 206 209 D - o E n 02 PARTITION PLAN 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR. ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E PARTITION SCHEDULE PARTITION LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES STUD PARTITION TYPE (SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE) 1. SEE AN-SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. SPACING MAX DETAIL INSULATION TYPE, WHERE OCCURS (SEE INSULATION TYPES) 2. PARTITIONS DIMENSIONED TO FINISH FACE U.O.N. DO NOT ADJUST DIMENSIONS INDICATED AS "CLEAR" WITHOUT WRITTEN TYPE FIRE RATING UL # DESCRIPTION SSMA # (IN) DEFLECTION MAX HT STC THICKNESS REF. DIRECTION FROM ARCHITECT. DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING AS BUILT FIELD KEYNOTE CONDITIONS, INCLUDING FIELD MEASUREMENTS PRIOR TO START OF WORK, NOTIFY ARCHITECT WHERE DISCREPANCIES OCCUR. 1 001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 B 1 ti 202 4. USE CEMENTITIOUSBACKER BOARD ('DUROCK)OREQUAL ATPARTITIONS SCHEDULEDTORECEIVE CERAMIC TILE (U.O.N.). SEE SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 B03 NR NR NON-RATED 3 5/8" METAL STUDS FULL HEIGHT 362S125-33 16 U240 17' —5" 40 4 7/8" [SLAB-TO-SLAB] WITH ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPBOARD EACH SIDE. o NEW CONSTRUCTION FLOOR TO CEILING WINDOW FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATION OF TILE. 5. SEE A-8 DETAIL SHEET SERIES FOR TYPICAL PARTITION DETAILS, EXTEND OF FRAMING AND FINISHES. WHERE FURRED PARTITIONS EXCEED MAXIMUM HEIGHT, BRACE TO ADJACENT STRUCTURE. SEE A-8 DETAIL SHEET SERIES. TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 CO3 NR NR 3 5/8" METAL STUDS WITH ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPBOARD EACH 362S125-33 16 0240 17'- 5" 40 4 7/8"6. SIDE (PARTITION TERMINATES 6" ABOVE CEILING). 7. FIRE SAFE PENETRATIONS AT FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITIONS PER APPLICABLE UL ASSEMBLY. SEE A8 SHEET SERIES FOR PARTIAL HEIGHT WINDOW (WITH SILL) DOOR TAG (DOOR NUMBER BASED ON ROOM DETAILS. 8. MAINTAIN INTEGRITY OF EXISTING FIRE RESISTANT RATED ASSEMBLIES FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. NUMBER WITH ALPHA SUFFIX IF MULTIPLE) 9. PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED AT LOCATIONS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: GRAB BARS, SHELVING, OVERHEAD CABINETS, SIGNAGE, TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES, WALL MOUNT. EQUIPMENT, ETC. © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL 10. REFER TO A-2 SHEET SERIES FOR POWER & SIGNAL DEVICE LOCATIONS. AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN 11. PROVIDE LEVEL 4 FINISH U.O.N. PROVIDE LEVEL 5 FINISH AT ALL PARTITIONS TO RECEIVE WALL COVERING. REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATIONS INFORMATION. RECEIVED THE ARCHITECT. NEW 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION AND ADDITIONAL 12. LARGE SCALE DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SMALL SCALE DRAWINGS. DETAILS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVERALL, NOTIFY ARCHITECT IN WRITING WHERE DISCREPANCIES OCCUR. CITY OF TU KWILA 13. ALL EXPOSED OUTSIDE GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS SHALL HAVE A CONTINUOUS METAL CORNER BEAD. FEB 0 9 2016 NEW 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION 14. DIMENSIONS TAKEN FROM PERIMETER EXTERIOR WINDOW WALL ARE TAKEN FROM THE INSIDE FACE OF THE VERTICAL MULLION. DIMENSIONS MARKED VERIFY IN FIELD, SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO START OF WORK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 15. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH HVAC, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, DESIGN BUILD FIRE PROTECTION PERMIT Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK 0wner Approval: �. Ez t :, t;-_' F0 R-- �`C� m fit— + ;� 3 4,.8�"i EXISTING 1 HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND REPORT TO THE ARCHITECT DISCREPANCIES FOR CORRECTION AND ADJUSTMENT PRIOR TO CENTER START OF WORK. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE FOR INCREASED COST DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S LACK OF COORDINATION. CODE ',1/8 INSULATION TYPES EXISTING 2HR FIRE RESISTANT RATED PARTITION 16. PATCH FLOOR AND WALL AREAS DAMAGED DUE TO NEW CONSTRUCTION OR WHERE PENETRATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE FOR MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. FIRESAFE AT UL RATED ASSEMBLIES CONSISTENT WITH EXISTING UL RATING. ---_1-0" Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 O',ScCAPLI; 17. WHERE EXISTING RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE SHOWN, CONTRACTOR IS REQUESTED TO FIELD VERIFY AS BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS TO 7 EXISTING MILLWORK WITH OVERHEAD CABINETS CONFIRM RATINGS SHOWN. IF NON-COMPLIANT CONDITIONS ARE FOUND, DEMO AND REPLACE WITH NEW EQUIVALENT ULd, � `4 " E ) ASSEMBLY, OR REPORT FINDINGS TO OWNER/ARCHITECT IN WRITING WHO WILL PROVIDE WRITTEN DIRECTION. TYPE: MINERAL WOOL INSULATION FIBERGLASS BATT ACOUSTICAL INSULATION z 18. PATCH AND REPAIR ALL EXISTING PARTITIONS AFTER DEMOLITION WHERE DAMAGE HAS OCCURRED AT UNPROTECTED F NEW MILLWORK WITH OVERHEAD CABINETS LOCATIONS. PLEASE NOTE THAT DEMOLITION ACTIVITY MAY OCCUR BEYOND WORK LIMITS SHOWN ON DEMOLITION PLAN DUE TO A 11/2" K 11/2" CONCEALED CONDITIONS. B 2" L 2" tai°tee � I .r � aV�'JI` :� 19. ALL EXISTING FIRE RATINGS NEED TO BE MAINTAINED. IF DURING CONSTRUCTION THE CONTRACTOR FINDS ANY RATINGS C 21/2" M 21/2" MILS%a s( aI COMPROMISED HE MUST INCLUDE REPAIRS AS PART OF HIS SCOPE. D 31/2" N 31/2" """ AREA N.I.C. E EXISTING INSULATION TO REMAIN (ANY TYPE) P 61/4" ILI PI PARTITIODA F 6" Title: FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FERC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET MINERAL WOOL THERMAL INSULATION FIBERGLASS BATT THERMAL INSULATION R FIRE PROTECTION RISER CABINET G H 21/2" (R-8) 31/2" (R-9) R 21/2" (R-8) S 31/2" (R-11) 0 +42" - INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. 1 61/4" (R-18) T 61/4" (R-19) Sheet:2A=l m ARE E DUCATION C'ORP'ORATION JL4 KY ... ........... F .... .......... r....... Ott.................... ...........w...... . ... ........... .... ...................... ..... .. ............... ............. I .............. .... ..... ...... ..... ...... .. ........... . ............ ............ ...... .... ................................... CEC S SEATTLE 11 10 9 8 144'-71/2" 6 5 4 3 2 1 CONSOLIDATION 15'-11" 16'-6" 15'-6" 321- " 16'-6" 15'-6" 16'-6" 1 13'-21/2" 3'-0" BUILDING I I I I I I I I Ty�_ 645 ANDOVER A - EX n EX EX �- E- EX EX .TT� I �.. -� ._;._; E' EX E , EST ATB B __ Cm - — — -FX- — — — r - ------------T 1 — — — — — - o -61 ------t - �?---- � , i I Lij LU 9400 REGISTERED ITECT CT I N r ` - `~FR 1� ! B. MILLER S TE OF ASHIN TON ,. I v E EX I N.I.C. _ X W I ` _, .. .. �. .. J N Eo E X vUj I I; _ I I�� 69 I L, ,moi �' - ���` �� aEE�, >> � ❑=� �� ---- -- Lu EX 7-1 i 1 I ti EO 0 I I 1. G. I i i o —i — �- -- I I I r M � � 1 X/ D I I I I E o I I I I I I I I I I 02 POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN 1 1/811 = 1'-0't 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date I N T E R 10 R /--\ ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE POWER & SIGNAL LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET FT-] FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. SEE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. WALL MOUNTED DEDICATED OUTLET FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET D 3. 4. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL FINAL FLOOR CORE LOCATIONS WITH FURNITURE VENDOR, OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO START OF WORK. G.C. TO MAINTAIN EXISTING UL FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY FOR ALL PENETRATIONS. 1 001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 db WALL MOUNTED QUAD OUTLET ❑O FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DATA OUTLET 5. ALL NEW COVER PLATES, STROBES, SWITCHES, AND PLUGS, ETC. TO BE WHITE AT PAINTED AND FABRIC WALL AREAS U.O.N. ALL COVER PLATES AT WOOD VENEER WALLS TO BE DARK BROWN U.O.N. REPLACE EXISTING COVER PLATES, PLUGS, SWITCHES, ETC. WITH NEW. SEATTLE WASHINGTON 98154 SUBMIT COLOR SELECTION TO ARCHITECT PRIOR TO START OF WORK. TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 JBI WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX 1 WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET 6. WHERE DEVICES ARE SHOWN BACK TO BACK, OFFSET AS REQUIRED TO COMPENSATE FOR BOX AND STUD DIMENSIONS. USE CENTER POINT BETWEEN DEVICE LOCATIONS AS REFERENCE POINT FOR LOCATION DIMENSION U.O.N. IL ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET WALL MOUNTED DATA OUTLET 7. COORDINATE DEVICE LOCATIONS PRIOR TO START OF WORK INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SYSTEM FURNITURE LAYOUT, FREE STANDING AND BUILT-IN FURNITURE, MILLWORK, STRUCTURAL COLUMN LINES AT 'POKE -THROUGH, LOCATIONS FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED WIRED JUNCTION BOX WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET 8. & FACE OF FINISH AT PARTITIONS AND FLOOR. WHERE APPLICABLE CONDUCT PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. WHERE'WHIPS' ARE SCHEDULED FOR SYSTEM FURNITURE, PROVIDE COMPLETE CODE COMPLIANT INSTALLATION INCLUDING, BUT NOT © INTERIOR ARCH I T E R T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALLL D DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL ® FLOOR MOUNTED QUAD OUTLET 0 WALL MOUNTED CARD READER LIMITED TO'WHIP' MUST BE VISIBLE AND READILY ACCESSIBLE, SYSTEM FURNITURE'WHIP' INSTALLATION, HOOK UP AND ACTIVATION SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL LABOR LAWS AND JURISDICTION REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING UL., LOCATE'WHIP' OUTSIDE CLEAR ZONES REQUIRED AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. FOR CIRCULATION, ADA ACCESSIBLE ROUTES AND EXIT PATH. FURNITURE MOUNTED DUPLEX OUTLET WALL MOUNTED PUSH BUTTON 9. MEP TO BE DESIGN BUILD. OUTKETS TO BE ADDED PER CODE REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO OWNER'S REQUESTED OUTLETS ABOVE. FURNITURE MOUNTED TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET ❑ WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT TSAT _ AV AV FLOOR MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX WALL WALL WHIP - DATA/POWER 2 2 OF TEUDATA &POWER DROPS ❑X EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION FI -7 - ' Drawn: AS, LMJ Check aGJ�ecker 5 ,� OwnerApprpq!:, I �.' es "�' .✓ .s. t9 t A k, a% i P �o inn � � w i s . Job No: 05CECO.0193 000 Scale: 1 1/8" FLR FLOOR WHIP - DATA/POWER 22 22_.�# OFTEL/DATA & POWER DROPS AREA NOT IN CONTRACT ® FLOOR MONUMENT- POWER u ® CONNECTOR � yu SIG"= AL ® Erml ANNOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS FURNISH: SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO PROJECT SITE READY FOR UNLOADING, UNPACKING & INSTALLATION. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA INSTALL: OPERATIONS ON PROJECT SITE INCL. UNLOADING, TEMP. STORING, UNPACKING, INSTALLING, ASSEMBLING, PLACING, ANCHORING, FINISHING, PROTECTING, CLEANING ETC. PUAN APPLYING, PROVIDE: FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE READY FOR THE INTENDED USE. FEB 0 9 2016 Title: D - DENOTES DEMOLITION GFI - DENOTES GROUND FAULT INTERRUPT E - DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN 6+42" - INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. PERMIT CENTER ef%= A, R - DENOTES RELOCATED Sheet: ARETR E:DIUCATION C:0 RR O RA T 7 O N I^0 n %.< .............. ..... . ...... ... ........... ........... I ........ ........... ......... . ......... C C SB SEATTLE 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 11 C ® TIO 1, 144-71/2 „ 15'-11" 16'-6" ! 1514" 321-10" 164" 15'4" 16'4" 13'-21/2" 3'-0" TJ �' BUILDING 7 645 ANDOVER PARK i I I I a' N \ I I I I I I I WEST ; m, " W I 0 TU KWI LA, WA 96166 y ��u E . e LAB 9400 y7—Xi REGISTERED Fs HITECT _, I` I E E I E E ( E E E E E E I E E 1 I y 11 a STA F F SHIO FR MILLER LOU GE LAB STA OF WASHINGTON 201 203 N.I.C.FEI' E E E E E E E r 00 �I I I ' 1 r 1 m I m m F 3 � E t — <il EO 1. C., N I CV co M I I N.I.C. i II I om 4�z' /Z/1/v I � t.� I � I nod Ii I 1 02 RCP 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date I N T E R 10 R, ARCHITECTS S E A T T L E FIXTURE SCHEDULE RCP LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES ®I CEILING MOUNTED ONE SIDED EXIT SIGNO CEILING MOUNTED SPECIALTY PENDENT 1. SEE AN-SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. VERIFY AS-BUILT FIELD CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS FOR EXISTING AND NEW PLUMBING, AUDIO VISUAL, HVAC DUCTWORK AND PIPING, 10 CEILING MOUNTED TWO SIDED EXIT SIGN STRUCTURAL FRAMING, ELECTRICAL BUS DUCT AND CONDUIT BANKS, ELECTRICAL PULL BOXES, FIRE PROTECTION LINES AND RELATED 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 I �11` WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN WORK TO DETERMINE AND COORDINATE BEST CEILING FRAMING, POINTS OF ACCESS AND CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED FOR NEW WORK. 3. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS WHERE REQUIRED IN GYP.BD. CEILING INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS, FIRE LIFE SAFETY SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 o LINEAR FLUORESCENT J-BOXES, FAN COILS AND VAV BOXES PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS, CONDUIT BANK PULL BOXES AND CONTROL TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 0 LINEAR FLUORESCENT WALL WASHER AND SHUTOF VALVES. 4. UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN PROVIDE FLUSH DRYWALL TYPE ACCESS PANELS W/ CONCEALED FRAME AT ALL NON RATED LOCATIONS. 2X4 FLUORESCENT TROFFER FIXTURE ® 5. ALL CEILING MOUNTED ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHALL BEAR UL LABEL AND FREE OF DEFECTS. 6. WHERE EXISTING ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE IS SCHEDULED TO REMAIN, REPLACE DAMAGED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE WITH NEW TO MATCH EXISTING. IF PRODUCT IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM BUILDING INVENTORY ATTIC STOCK OR MANUFACTURER, NOTIFY ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ® 2X2 FLUORESCENT TROFFER FIXTURE START OF WORK. 7. LIGHTING CONTROL COVER PLATES SHALL BE WHITE AT GYP BD CEILINGS, SOFFITS AND CEILING MOUNTED FABRIC WRAPPED PANEL ©2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL O RECESSED DOWNLIGHT LOCATIONS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. AT EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS IN STEEL BUILDINGS WITH EXPOSED SPRAY FIREPROOFING, PROVIDE PROTECTIVE OVERSPRAY OVER SPRAY AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. ❑ RECESSED SQUARE DOWNLIGHT FIREPROOFING TO PREVENT DUSTING WHERE PAINT IS SCHEDULED AT EXPOSED STRUCTION PROVIDE PRIMER/SEALER UNDERCOAT PER o> RECESSED WALL WASHER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS. CEILING MOUNTED PENDANT 9. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE FIRE SPRINKLER AND FIRE ALARM DEVICE LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SUBMITTING FOR PERMIT. WHERE APPLICABLE CENTER SPRINKLER HEADS IN CEILING TIME. ALIGN SPEAKERS, SMOKE DETECTORS, MOTION SENSORS AND RELATED WALL MOUNTED SCONCE CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES WITH LIGHTING FIXTURE CENTERLINES AND CENTER OF CEILING TILE. LOCATE HVAC DIFFUSERS IN GYP BD WALL MOUNTED SINGLE LIGHT SWITCH CEILINGS AS SHOW ON ARCHITECTURAL R.C.P. 10. LOCATE EXIT SIGNS VERTICALLY ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR TO INSURE SIGHT LINES ARE NOT BLOCKED BY LIGHT FIXTURES, BEAMS, SOFFITS, Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: Checker Owner Approval: EXISTING WALL MOUNTED SINGLE LIGHT 1 SWITCHffN E EXISTING DROPPED CEILINGS, DUCTWORK, CONDUIT BANKDS, PIPING AND RELATED OVERHEAD WORK. _ d y Job No: 05CEC0.0193.00 CE C#,: z, :s Scale 1/8" = 1'-0" .; = h TYP. CEILING GRID AND LIGHT FIXTURE 1 � n 2 .5 RECESSED PROJECTION SCREEN AREA N.I.C. RECEIVED * 7; �;', t L a",9' ­T;I�LI G -- '�/ -- -_ CITY OF TUKWILA VLAIM Title: FEB 092016 ANNOTATIONS AND DEFINITIONS PERMIT CENTER f"A=3 0 D - DENOTES DEMOLITION 1-® FS_ INDICATES MOUNTING HEIGHT A.F.F. E DENOTES EXISTING TO REMAIN Icn INDICATES USE FOR PROJECTION SCREEN - Sheet: a R - DENOTES RELOCATED 1_,3 - INDICATES THREE WAY SWITCH 02 FINISH PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" I I FINISH LEGEND I SHEET NOTES I KEY NOTES I ANNOTATIONS PT - PAINT WT - WINDOW TREATMENT MCT - METAL CEILING TILE RB- BASE FAB - FABRIC SPC - SPECIAL CEILING PL- PLASTIC LAMINATE WC - WALL COVERING WDP - WOOD WALL PANELS CPT - CARPET ACT - ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AWT - ACOUSTICAL WALL TILE WD - WOOD CON - CONCRETE HW- HARDWARE ST - STONE VCT - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FWP - FABRIC WRAPPED PANEL FT- FLOOR TRANSITION GL- GLASS MP- MODERNFOLD PARTITION TL- TILE FLM- FILM G - GROUT Ss- SOLID SURFACE 0 a N 1. SEE AN -2.0 SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. SEE AN -4.0 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE. FLOOR FINISH SHEET NOTES 1. SEE AN -SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTENT OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES 3. ALL FLOORING TRANISTIONS AT DOOR TO OCCUR ON CENTER LINE OF DOOR, EXCEPT AT EXTERIOR DOORS. 4. PROVIDE RUBBER MEMBRANE WATER PROFFING AT CERAMIC TILE LOCATIONS. 5. ALL NEW/EXISTING VCT FLOORING TO BE CLEANED, STRIPPED AND SEALED PER MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS WALL FINISH SHEET NOTES 1. SEE AN -SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXTENT OF MATERIALS AND FINISHES 3. SEE AN -3.0 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE. 4. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED P-1 THROUGHOUT, U.O.N. 5. ALL WALLS TO RECEIVE WALL BASE B-1 THROUGHOUT, U.O.N. 6. ALL CEILING SOFFITS TO RECEIVE PAINT P-5, REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ASO 7. SEAL ALL TILE GROUT PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS, 8. PROVIDE CORNER GUARD AT INDICATED OUTSIDE CORNERS. REFER TO CHART FOR COORDINATIONG COLOR. 9. PAINT ALL NEW AND EXISTING DOOR FRAMES, COLOR TO MATCH WALL ADJACENT. FINISH TO BE SEMI -GLOSS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER f I*wAlf �, sly '• �' is � t�. • �'' � ;�' •, . 9400 / EGISTERED ;At3 tHITECTCT MILLER 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTE RI OR ARCH ITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: AS, LMJ Check: SLK Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Owner Approval: 4 �A v-. ,,� p.... g EVE I'_ -D 6—oR, a Sealers io�., . Title: FIONISH POL 'Am IN' Sheet:zA-4mO = 1'-0" 02 FURNITURE PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 FURNITURE LEGEND SHEET NOTES KEY NOTES 1. SEE AN -SHEET SERIES FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND ABBREVIATIONS. 2. XX RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA FEB 0 9 2016 PERMIT CENTER 94001 %_ REGISTERED -RW B. MILLER OF WASHINGTON 1 ISSUE FOR BID AND PERMIT 02/05/2016 Delta Issue Nr. Description Date INTERIOR ARCHITECTS SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 @ 2016 1 N T E R 10 R A R 0 H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION. ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CONSTITUTE THE ORIGINAL I� AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND THE SAME MAY NOT BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: AS, LMJ ____Check: SLK _Q.Wner Approval: Co Job No: 05CECO.01 �" � 'fn r't 1. T,:7,7) Scale: 1/81, = 1'_011 BUILD 0 'A=5oO Sheet: ?m :CAREER SCRIBE TO WALL t-DU ATION . . P—LAM ON 3/a /REFER TO ENLARGED PIANS COUNTERTOP W/ CRP'0FEATIOf HARDWOOD EDGE —PLAM > .. PLAN WORKSURFACE r SOLID SURFACE TRANSACTION TOP SOLID SURFACE TRANSACTION TO 3 STEEL WORKSURFACE SUPPORT 3'-0" O.C. - - 11/4' SATIN ALUMINUM STAND-OFFS COORDINATE LOCATION 11/4°SATIN ALUMINUM STAND-OFFS WITH FURNITURE PLAM FRONT PANE L PLAN FRONT PANEL o g STEEL SUPPORT BRACKETS STEEL SUPPORT BRACKETS 3'-0" TYP. _ 3'-0" TYP. � J _ o� o PLAM INTERIOR cV N PLAN INTERIOR 2'-6" CEC SSEATTLE FURNITURE B .O. FINISHED PLAM END PANEL FINISHED PLAM END PANEL C ® S 0 L T 13 LIBRARY DESK ELEVATION 04 12 LIBRARY DESK ELEVATION 03 3/8" = 1'-0" 3/8" = 1'-0" m A-6.0 12 1 C� 3 645DOVE OR` PARK EST 6'-111/2" T 96166 SCHEDULED SOLID I' 0° SURFACE TRANSACTION *400 STERED 1 1/4" DIA "MOCKETT" I SOLID SURFACE I SOLID SURFACE TRANSATION TOP I ECT ......... _ STAND—OFF MODEL TRANSATIONTOP -- - "MPB 10", SATIN ALUM MOCKETT 2-3/8 J STANDATINALUMINUM 11/4"SATIN ALUMINUM STAND-OFFS . MILLER METAL GROMMET MODEL SHINGTON "GRN 1-23" P—LAM COUNTERTOP AS M °° PLAMFRONTPANEL °O PLAM FRONT PANEL REFER TOE/RGEDNS SCHEDULED M N `a ALIGN SEAM OF P�.AM PANEL W/—ALIGN SEAM OF P -LAM PANEL W/ , CENTER UNE OF STAND-OFFS CENTER LINE OF STAND-OFFS N HARDWOOD EDGE UNDER P—LAM - - PLAN TOE KICKPLAM TOE KICK z 1/4° REVEAL, PAINTED TO MATCH PLAM 1/4° REVEAL, PAINTED TO MATCH PLAM CONTINUOUS WIRE MOLD LIBRARY DESK ELEVATION 02 LIBRARY DESK ELEVATION 01 01 LIBRARY ENLARGED PLAN STEEL WORKSURFACE SUPPORT 3'-0" O.C. 11 3/8" = 1'-0" 10 3/8" = 1'-0" 9 1/4" = 1'-0" DOUG MOCKETT #SWS2 METALLIC SILVER W FURNITURE B.O. z 0 0 w 0 w WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED —L M FRONT AS SCHEDULED 1/4" REVEAL PAINTED l l TO MATCH P—LAM I : — 1 0 0 0 0 _ o o _•..� o e � � �; /p p\ EQ EQ EQ 1 1 8 -8 - 1-8 EQ EQ EQ P—LAM COUNTERTOP STAFF LOUNGE ELEVATION REFER TO ENLARGED PIANS AS SCHEDULED $ 3/8" = 1'-0" HARDWOOD EDGE UNDER P—LAM CONTINUOUS WIRE MOLD STEEL WORKSURFACE SUPPORT 3'-0" O.C. DOUG MOCKETT #SWS2 METALLIC SILVER z o o _o _o c c c c WOOD BLOCKING AS —PLAM WORKSURFACE REQUIRED P—LAM FRONT AS STEEL PPORT BRACKETS, SCHEDULED EVERY 3U-0 ASN NEEDED r _ -I cry o = I FILE CABINET BY FURNITURE VENDOR F, PLAM WORKSURFACE `, j I I Delta Issue Nr. Description Date 1/4" REVEAL PAINTED SOLID SURFACE TRANSACTION TOP I — — I TO MATCH P—LAM PLAN WORKSURFACE �1 1/4" SATIN ALUMINUM STAND-OFFS 4 I LAM FROM PANEL LPLAM INTERIOR r —_— , STEEL SUPPORT BRACKETS, EVERY 3'-0° AS NEEDED L _I cn3'-O" TYP. STEELSUPPORT BRACKETS FILE CABINET BYFURNITUREVENDOR M _ RECEPTION DESK ELEVATION 03 N r -- -I N PLAN INTERIOR 4 - _ " 3/8 -1 ARCHITECTS 1A FINISHED PLAM END PANEL _.................. .._.._.._. _ S E= "MOCKETT" 2-3/8" METAL GROMMET MODEL "GRN1-23" RECEPTION DESK ELEVATION 05 RECEPTION DESK ELEVATION 04 P—LAM ON 3/4"6 3/8" = 1'-0"3/8" = 1'-0" ,- 3 GL $ 6 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 4° COUNTERTOP W/ HARDWOOD EDGE _ _ _ _ _ _ _ SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 r © 2016 I N T E R 10 R A R C H I T E C T S, INC., A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION'' 4 SATIN ALUMINUM PULL ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CZONSTITUTE THE,ORIGINAca 5A -6.O 6 AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT,pID TH.E_SAME MAY NOT CONTINUOUS WIRE MOLD o THEARCHTTECD. USED, OR DISCLOSED WfHUT KI1yEiWRfTT NCONSETlO= N 3/4" DOOR W/ SCHEDULED P—LAM ALL A 6.0 VISIBLE SIDES 2 5r? SCHEDULED EQUIPMENT w s c r I WHITE MELAMINE INTERIOR Drawn: SA, LMJ Check: SLK Owner'Approvala� SOLID SURFACE I F"•�gp�ny� e� „ SOLID SURFACE TTiANSATIONTOP CONCEALED HINGES 1 1/4SATIN ALUMINUM STAND-OFFS 11/4•SATINALUMINUM STAND-OFFS Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 Scale: As indicated °� - PLAM FROM PANELS - mo M o PLAM FRONTPANEL 3 " P—LAM BASE SCRIBED TO FLOOR co `D cm ALIGN SEAM OFP-OAMPANELW/ RECEIVED "LARGED S5 /4 N CENTER LINE OF STAND-OFFS \l/ \1 A 77-1 Cis ®F TuKwiLA ELEV�4TIO S 3" PLAN TOE KICK lAM TOE KICK 1/4' REVEAL, PAINED TO MATCH PLAN 1/4' REVEAL, PAINTED TO MATCH PLAN FEB 0 9 2016 Title: ETAI LS n RECEPTION AND LIBRARY DESK DETAILS RECEPTION DESK ELEVATION 02 RECEPTION DESK ELEVATION 01 1 01 RECEPTION ENLARGED PLAN .t. CENTER a ` 1 1/211 = 1'-0" 3 3/8" = 1'-0" 23/8" = 1'-0" m Sheet: A t).0s 2 CL a CC 3 UNDER COUNTER MICROWAVE IUILDING WINDOW SYSTEM. VERIFY )N TYPE TO INSURE PROPER -IMENT COMPRESSABLE NEOPRENE GASKET NIDTH AS MULLION EGLET OR EQUAL METAL CLOSER. TO MATCH WALL )F SILL BELOW (WHERE OCCURS) � Ll NOTE: NEW FASTENERS ARE NOT PERMITTED AT (E) EXTERIOR WINDOW COMPONENTS. 3 PARTITION TO EXTERIOR WINDOW MULLION 3" = 1'-0" CE TYP. 3" BASE CABINET W/ SINK NOTE: CABINET TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF 3/4" MARINE PLYWOOD, CLAD WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE. ALL INTERIOR EXPOSED SURFACES WILL BE PLASTIC LAMINATE. SCHEDULED BACKSPLASH (SEE ELEVATION) SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP (SEE ELEVATION) SCHEDULED CABINET HARDWARE CABINET SIDE PANEL BEYOND PROVIDE PIPE PROTECTION CONCEALED HINGES P. LAM BASE AS SCHEDULED SEE ELEVATIONS LU W BASE CABINET WITH DRAWER 1 1/2" = 1'-0" BACKSPLASH 10N) SOLID SURFACE P CABINET NET DRAWERS kS SCHEDULED � CABINET ABLE 'E MELAMINE PLE HOLES 3S INTERIOR "E MELAMINE HINGES P. LAM IONS T45 ANDOVER WEST 9 P' 98188 aann Delta Issue Nr. Description Date RECEIVED IA I N T E R 10 R CITY OFNKWILA BRACE BEYOND ARC H ITECTS 25 GA. MIN. DIAG. BRACE, �1 ANCHOR TO TOP TRACK OF PARTITION. 00 0 o° 3/8" CONT. FOAM SOUND ISOLATION TAPE TOP TRACK, ANCHORED TO DIAG. z BRACING. E=Rc� ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE, AS SCHEDULED WHERE OCCURS WITH CONTINUOUS PERIMETER L. fr L� FINISH TO MATCH EXPOSED SUSPENSION CEILING 1 LAYER OF GYP. BOARD, EACH SIDE OF METAL STUDS ACOUSTICAL FIBERGLASS BAT INSULATION WHERE OCCURS. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE - o CV {r s<: 4 >; 3" BASE CABINET W/ SINK NOTE: CABINET TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF 3/4" MARINE PLYWOOD, CLAD WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE. ALL INTERIOR EXPOSED SURFACES WILL BE PLASTIC LAMINATE. SCHEDULED BACKSPLASH (SEE ELEVATION) SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP (SEE ELEVATION) SCHEDULED CABINET HARDWARE CABINET SIDE PANEL BEYOND PROVIDE PIPE PROTECTION CONCEALED HINGES P. LAM BASE AS SCHEDULED SEE ELEVATIONS LU W BASE CABINET WITH DRAWER 1 1/2" = 1'-0" BACKSPLASH 10N) SOLID SURFACE P CABINET NET DRAWERS kS SCHEDULED � CABINET ABLE 'E MELAMINE PLE HOLES 3S INTERIOR "E MELAMINE HINGES P. LAM IONS T45 ANDOVER WEST 9 P' 98188 aann Delta Issue Nr. Description Date RECEIVED IA I N T E R 10 R CITY OFNKWILA BRACE BEYOND ARC H ITECTS 25 GA. MIN. DIAG. BRACE, �1 ANCHOR TO TOP TRACK OF PARTITION. 00 0 o° 3/8" CONT. FOAM SOUND ISOLATION TAPE TYPE C - NON RATED PARTITION - 6 IN ABOVE CEILING 3" = 1'-0" SCHEDULED PARTITION BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT, TYP. SLOTTED TOP TRACK -ATTACH TO STRUCTURE ABOVE W/ POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS @ 2'-0 O.C., STAGGER LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. RUNNER FASTEN TO SLAB W/ POWER I FASTENERS @ 2'-0" O.C. STAGGERED = 4NUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. iULED BASE AND FLOOR COVERING, TYP. '.- 17 AYER OF GYP. ARD, EACH SIDE OF :TAL STUDS 'CHEN & RESTROOM: LIEU OF GYP. BD. USE CEMENTITIOUS CKER BOARD OUSTICAL CEILING TILE, AS SCHEDULED iERE OCCURS WITH CONTINUOUS PERIMETER FINISH TO MATCH EXPOSED SUSPENSION ILING U.O.N. MU US I ML FIBERGLASS INSULATION WHERE OCCURS. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE. METAL RUNNER ANCHOR TO SLAB W/ POWER DRIVEN FASTENER @ 24" D.C., STAGGER LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS BASE AND FLOOR COVERING, TYP. SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 ©2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., ACAI ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CON AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THI THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: SA, LMJ Check: SLK Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 COFIPOI`YnON fHE ORIGINAL fc NSENNQTFILOA aI C``;� fcorisENroP� `� 2 55 9_;16 Scale: As indicated �) , TOP TRACK, ANCHORED TO DIAG. BRACING. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE, AS SCHEDULED WHERE OCCURS WITH CONTINUOUS PERIMETER L. FINISH TO MATCH EXPOSED SUSPENSION CEILING 1 LAYER OF GYP. BOARD, EACH SIDE OF METAL STUDS ACOUSTICAL FIBERGLASS BAT INSULATION WHERE OCCURS. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE TYPE C - NON RATED PARTITION - 6 IN ABOVE CEILING 3" = 1'-0" SCHEDULED PARTITION BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE CONTINUOUS ACOUSTICAL SEALANT, TYP. SLOTTED TOP TRACK -ATTACH TO STRUCTURE ABOVE W/ POWER DRIVEN FASTENERS @ 2'-0 O.C., STAGGER LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. RUNNER FASTEN TO SLAB W/ POWER I FASTENERS @ 2'-0" O.C. STAGGERED = 4NUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. iULED BASE AND FLOOR COVERING, TYP. '.- 17 AYER OF GYP. ARD, EACH SIDE OF :TAL STUDS 'CHEN & RESTROOM: LIEU OF GYP. BD. USE CEMENTITIOUS CKER BOARD OUSTICAL CEILING TILE, AS SCHEDULED iERE OCCURS WITH CONTINUOUS PERIMETER FINISH TO MATCH EXPOSED SUSPENSION ILING U.O.N. MU US I ML FIBERGLASS INSULATION WHERE OCCURS. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE. METAL RUNNER ANCHOR TO SLAB W/ POWER DRIVEN FASTENER @ 24" D.C., STAGGER LOCATIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS BASE AND FLOOR COVERING, TYP. SEATTLE 1001 4TH AVENUE, SUITE 3600 SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98154 TEL 206-264-9195 FAX 206-624-1525 ©2016 INTERIOR ARCHITECTS, INC., ACAI ALL DRAWINGS AND WRITTEN MATERIAL HEREIN CON AND UNPUBLISHED WORK OF THE ARCHITECT, AND BE DUPLICATED, USED, OR DISCLOSED WITHOUT THI THE ARCHITECT. Drawn: SA, LMJ Check: SLK Job No: 05CECO.0193.000 COFIPOI`YnON fHE ORIGINAL fc NSENNQTFILOA aI C``;� fcorisENroP� `� 2 55 9_;16 Scale: As indicated �) ,